WO2011059301A2 - Portable display apparatus - Google Patents

Portable display apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011059301A2
WO2011059301A2 PCT/KR2010/008110 KR2010008110W WO2011059301A2 WO 2011059301 A2 WO2011059301 A2 WO 2011059301A2 KR 2010008110 W KR2010008110 W KR 2010008110W WO 2011059301 A2 WO2011059301 A2 WO 2011059301A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
display
panel housing
housing
panel
plate
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/KR2010/008110
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Other versions
WO2011059301A3 (en
Inventor
김시환
Original Assignee
Kim Si-Han
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from KR20090110228A external-priority patent/KR20110038560A/en
Application filed by Kim Si-Han filed Critical Kim Si-Han
Priority to CN2010800519028A priority Critical patent/CN102667584A/en
Priority to US13/509,645 priority patent/US8964365B2/en
Publication of WO2011059301A2 publication Critical patent/WO2011059301A2/en
Publication of WO2011059301A3 publication Critical patent/WO2011059301A3/en
Priority to US14/595,282 priority patent/US20150123908A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1615Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with several enclosures having relative motions, each enclosure supporting at least one I/O or computing function
    • G06F1/1624Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with several enclosures having relative motions, each enclosure supporting at least one I/O or computing function with sliding enclosures, e.g. sliding keyboard or display
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • G06F1/1641Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing the display being formed by a plurality of foldable display components
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • G06F3/1423Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units controlling a plurality of local displays, e.g. CRT and flat panel display
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/02Composition of display devices
    • G09G2300/026Video wall, i.e. juxtaposition of a plurality of screens to create a display screen of bigger dimensions

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method of using two displays as a single screen, and more particularly, to at least two panel housings equipped with a display in a stacked state, and when the panel housing is moved by sliding the display.
  • the present invention relates to providing a structure in which the interconnections are connected to each other within 0.1 mm to 5 mm so that they can be used as a single display.
  • a flat panel display panel used may include LCD, OLED, FED, PDP, and electric paper.
  • any flat panel display can be used.
  • a separate panel housing that is slidable is provided, and when the display is mounted on each of the panel housings, the displays are configured to be adjacent to each other.
  • the seam is a non-screen display area generated between the display.
  • the seams are minimized by arranging the displays effectively designed on one side to be adjacent to each other.
  • the present invention is characterized in that when the panel housing in the stacked state up and down is unfolded, the two displays can be connected to each other to form a single screen, so that the displays in the stacked state are positioned at the same height. It is an object to provide a moving means in the vertical direction together with the sliding means in the left and right directions.
  • At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, respectively, and a display is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings, and the upper and lower panel housings are slidably moved in the left and right directions, respectively, and also in the vertical direction.
  • a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm, and a cover is provided at a joint of the display. It is characterized by.
  • a support unit for supporting the upper panel housing is provided, and the support unit moves through the upper panel housing and the spring complex and is compressed or expanded when a force is applied, and is restored when the force is released, and the seam of the lower display is connected to the lower panel housing.
  • a lower cover is provided to cover the secondary side, and the lower cover is movable in the vertical direction.
  • the display is mounted directly to the flame housing, the lower portion of the frame housing is provided with a display device body parts, the connection portion is connected to the display in the frame housing is provided, the support portion for supporting the upper panel housing is provided, The support is characterized by coming out of the lower panel housing boundary.
  • one panel housing in the two panel housings characterized in that the height is thinner, the portable display device, characterized in that the distance between the input device provided on the top of the display is within 0.1mm to 5mm.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates a portable display device of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state in which displays overlap each other and are stacked.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the display is slid.
  • FIG. 4 is a view illustrating a panel housing with a protective cover removed.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an input device provided on an upper portion of a display.
  • FIG. 6 shows a diagram in which the input device 250 is mounted on the top of the display 2 and 4.
  • FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a seam of a display and is an enlarged view of a portion A of FIG. 5.
  • FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of an input device and is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 5.
  • 9 is a cross-sectional view of the display.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
  • FIG. 11 is a view in which the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view when a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
  • 13 is a cross-sectional view when the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted on a panel housing sidewall.
  • 15 is a view showing that the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing separately.
  • 16 to 18 are views showing that the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
  • 19 shows the support means between the display and the input device.
  • 20 to 22 are views showing support means in the form of another intermediate plate of the display and the input device.
  • FIG. 23 shows a display with a connector attached.
  • 24 to 26 are views illustrating the shape of a display panel according to still another embodiment.
  • 27 to 30 are block diagrams illustrating the present invention.
  • 31 is a flowchart showing the present invention.
  • 38 to 40 are views of an embodiment in which the lower panel housing is slidingly moved.
  • 41 to 52 are views of yet another embodiment of a sliding structure.
  • 53 is a sectional view of two panel housings.
  • Fig. 54 is a sectional view when the two panel housings have similar thicknesses.
  • 55 to 57 show an embodiment with a frame housing.
  • 59 to 62 illustrate a method of mounting a display.
  • 63 is a diagram of an embodiment when using as a mobile phone.
  • 64 is a diagram of an embodiment when used for character input or the like.
  • 65 is a flowchart illustrating an input keyboard mode according to a combined sensor.
  • 66 is a flowchart illustrating a coupling sensor.
  • 67-70 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of FIGS. 49-52.
  • 71 to 73 illustrate a lower panel housing and a projection board according to another embodiment.
  • 74 and 75 are views illustrating a principle in which the protrusion plate is slid.
  • 76 is a view of still another embodiment in which the protrusion plate is slid.
  • 77 and 78 are views showing the principle of movement by the moving bar.
  • 79 to 81 are views showing the lower part of the upper panel housing.
  • 82 to 84 are views of the embodiment provided with the side protuberances.
  • FIG. 86 to 88 illustrate the principle of movement of the projection board in the embodiment of FIG. 85.
  • FIG. 86 to 88 illustrate the principle of movement of the projection board in the embodiment of FIG. 85.
  • 89 to 91 are views of the embodiment in which the shape of the protective cover is changed.
  • 92 and 93 are views illustrating the lower panel housing.
  • FIG. 94 is a view of another embodiment where the spring assembly is coupled to the bottom plate of FIG. 46.
  • FIG. 95 is a structural diagram illustrating a sliding principle of FIG. 94.
  • 96 is a view showing a plate and a support plate.
  • FIG. 97 is a view illustrating the sliding principle of FIG. 96.
  • 98 is a view showing a side plate provided on the base plate.
  • 100 is a principle diagram in which the panel housing moves by the projection head.
  • 101 to 103 are views illustrating a principle in which the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing move in the left, right, and up and down directions.
  • 105 and 106 are views showing the principle of the path that the panel housing moves through the spring projection.
  • 107 is a view showing the movement of the upper and lower panel housings.
  • 108-111 illustrate an embodiment of a spring assembly.
  • 112 through 118 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of the sliding structure.
  • 119 and 120 are views of an embodiment provided with an extension.
  • 121 is a view showing an example of a coupling unit.
  • 122 and 123 are views of another embodiment in which the lower panel housing is moved.
  • chassis 250 input device
  • protrusion 24 top cover
  • 250-1, 250-2 input device 105; Main body control unit
  • control unit 51 cover
  • the present invention provides a folding portable display device having an effect of viewing at least one screen by interconnecting at least two flat panel displays.
  • a flat panel display panel LCD, OLED, FED, PDP, Electric Paper, etc. can be used, but not limited to this, any flat panel display can be used.
  • the two displays are connected to each other within 0.1mm or more and less than 5mm to form a single screen.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates a portable display device of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a view illustrating a state in which the displays 2 and 4 are unfolded.
  • the upper panel housing 20 includes an upper display 2
  • the lower panel housing 40 includes a lower display 4.
  • the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are provided in the housing 50.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state in which displays overlap each other and are stacked.
  • a lower panel housing 40 on which the lower display 4 is mounted is provided below the upper panel housing 20 on which the upper display 2 is mounted. That is, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 overlap each other and are formed by being stacked.
  • the housing 50 for fixing the upper and lower panel housing 20, 40 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the handle 45 and to slide the lower panel housing 40 in the horizontal (arrow) direction.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the display is slid.
  • the lower panel housing 40 and the lower display 4 are unfolded so that the screen is expanded.
  • the protective cover 43 is connected to the lower panel housing 4 and moves together.
  • the protective cover 43 When the protective cover 43 is pressed, it enters into the lower panel housing 40 to be received. That is, when the upper display 20 and the lower display 40 are unfolded, the protective cover 43 can be stored as shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 4 is a view illustrating a panel housing with a protective cover removed.
  • the side of the display 2, 4 is mounted close to the panel housing side wall 20a.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an input device provided on an upper portion of a display.
  • the input device 250 is often provided at the top of the display 2, 4, and accordingly, the embodiment of the present invention includes the input device 250 at the top of the display 2, 4.
  • the displays 2 and 4 are mounted to the panel housings 20 and 40 while being mounted to the chassis 16.
  • the input device 250 is provided on the top of the chassis 16.
  • the attachment part 16c is provided on the side of the chassis 16 so that the input device is attached. It is obvious that the attachment portion 16c may use a double-sided adhesive, and an adhesive such as an adhesive bond may be used. In addition, fixing parts 16b are provided at both sides.
  • the input device may not be provided separately from the display, but may be provided as a sensor in each pixel of the display, and in this case, the embodiment of the present invention may be applied.
  • the sensor is a micro sensor element such as an optical sensor or a resistance sensor, various methods are possible.
  • FIG. 6 shows a diagram in which the input device 250 is mounted on the top of the display 2 and 4.
  • FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a seam of a display and is an enlarged view of a portion A of FIG. 5.
  • the distance J between the adjacent pixel 2n and the partition wall 2f is within 1 mm, and in the closest case, within 0.01 mm.
  • the boundary of the pixel 2n and the boundary of the partition 2f may coincide with each other.
  • the thickness K of the partition 2f is also within 1 mm and at least 0.05 mm. Therefore, the distance between the pixel 2n closest to the seam and the edge boundary 2g of the display 2, 4 is within 2 mm at least 0.06 mm or more.
  • the thickness of the chassis 16 shall not exceed 0.1 mm or more and 1 mm or less. However, the maximum thickness of the most efficient chassis 16 does not exceed 0.5 mm. Thus, the distance from the seam 8 to the boundary between the nearest pixel 2n and the chassis 16 is at most 2.5 mm and at least 0.16 mm.
  • the partition wall may be provided within the range of 0.001mm to 0.5mm at the boundary line 2g. .
  • the distance from the closest pixel 2n to the outer boundary 16g of the chassis 16 in the seam 8 is at most 3.0 mm or 3.5 mm.
  • FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of an input device and is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 5.
  • an input device is mounted on an upper portion of a display to serve to input or select information.
  • the portable display device of the present invention may further include an input device 250.
  • the conventional input device should not be used as it is, but the input device 250 made by design change is used.
  • a lead wire reading a capacitance value or a resistance value is provided on each side of the input device.
  • the position of the lead wire 250n in the joint portion must be changed.
  • the partition 250f may also exist.
  • the partition wall 250f may be omitted depending on the scheme.
  • the distance M between the lead wire 250n and the partition wall in the joint 8 is at least 0.005 mm to 1 mm, and the thickness L of the partition wall 250 f is also within 0.05 mm to 1 mm or 2 mm.
  • the distance between the lead wire 250n and the boundary 250g of the input device 250 is within 0.00mm to 2mm or within 3mm.
  • the boundary 250g of the seam 8 and the boundary of the partition 250f do not need to coincide completely, and it is natural that the partition 250f may be provided within a range of 0.5 mm from the boundary 250g. .
  • the maximum value between the lead wire 250n and the boundary line 250g is 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm.
  • the partition wall does not necessarily need to exist depending on the input device method such as the capacitance method.
  • the distance between the boundary line 250g and the lead wire 250n is within 2mm or 3mm from 0.01mm (0.06mm minus the minimum thickness of the bulkhead 0.05mm).
  • 250a represents an information input unit of the input device and may also be referred to as an active area in the input device.
  • the structure varies depending on the resistive film type and the capacitive type, and although the conventional method is used, any type of input device may be used as long as the input device has a flat plate structure and inputs information through the surface of the input device. Of course it is included.
  • 9 is a cross-sectional view of the display.
  • LCD can be used as the display, OLED or electronic paper, etc. can be used, and no matter which display is used, the distance between the display boundary 2g and the neighboring pixel 2n is very important in the seam 8, Naturally, the design values designed in the present invention can be applied to all flat panel displays as they are.
  • the display 2, 4 includes an insulating layer 53, an electrode 54, a coating electrode 58, an organic multilayer film 53, and the like on a substrate 51, and a moisture absorbing layer with a separator 57 interposed therebetween. 56 may also be further provided.
  • the substrate 51 is covered with the cover substrate 52.
  • the partition 2f may be a sealant formed of an adhesive or the like, but it is obvious that the substrate may serve as the partition 2f.
  • the edge portion of the substrate remaining in the etching process serves as the partition wall 2f. It is natural to be able to.
  • the neighboring pixels 2n should be formed closely in the joint portion 8, and the extent to which the neighboring pixels 2n are formed is the same as in the embodiment of FIG. 7.
  • the seam 8 should be determined at its value (" P " value in the figure).
  • the distance of P is set to be within 2 mm or 3 mm as in the embodiment of FIG. Of course, the minimum value is 0.06mm or more. In this way, the display pixel 2n should not be covered. Naturally, at the seam, the chassis 16 should not cover the pixels of the display 2, 4.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
  • An input device 250 is provided so that the seam 8 of the display 2 or 4 is mounted on the top of one side wall 20a of the panel housing.
  • a "" shaped cover 24 is provided at the top of the panel housing 20 to cover the edge of the non-display area of the display 2 or 4.
  • FIG. 11 is a view in which the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
  • the display 2 and the input device 250 are separated from each other and mounted on the panel housing 20, and the cover 24 provided in FIG. 10 is not provided.
  • the input device 250 also serves as an external protective plate that protects the surface of the display 2 in the portable display device.
  • the ““ ”shaped mask printing 16d is applied to the input device 250.
  • the mask printing 16d blocks the non-display area of the edges of the display 2 and 4.
  • the blocking effect is more visual.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view when a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
  • the battery or circuit main body 29 is provided inside the panel housing 20, and the supporting part 26a is further provided.
  • the support 26a supports the display 2 and 4.
  • the panel housing side wall 20a of the joint portion 8 is formed with a step so that the display 2 and 4 can be mounted on the step 20c.
  • a protrusion 20d is formed to support the input device 250.
  • the thickness Y of the protrusion 20d is equal to the distance between the display and the input device.
  • the length W from which the protrusion 20d protrudes should not exceed 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm in consideration of the non-display area of the display 2 and the thickness of the chassis 16.
  • the length W of the protrusion 20d should be at least 0.1 mm.
  • 13 is a cross-sectional view when the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
  • the upper cover 24 is omitted, and thus the input device 250 has a function of functioning as the upper cover.
  • each of the first supporting part 26a supporting the display 2 and the second supporting part 26b supporting the input device 250 are provided.
  • the structure in which the display 2 and the input device are mounted on the joint 8 has a concept similar to that of FIG.
  • the step 20c of the side wall 20a supports the display 2
  • the protrusion 20d of the side wall 20a supports the input device 250.
  • the length W of the protrusion 20d should not be beyond the screen non-display area of the display and should be 0.1 mm or more and 2.5 mm or less or 3.5 mm or less.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted on a panel housing sidewall.
  • 15 is a view showing that the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing separately.
  • the protective film 20b is further provided to protect the side of the display 2 and the input device 250.
  • the protective film 20b has a higher function of sealing effect than a function of protecting from physical shock. Therefore, the thickness does not need to be thick, but it is within 0.5mm from 0.01mm or more. Of course, when the protective film only to protect from external impact, the thickness of the protective film (20a) can be up to 1mm.
  • the display (2) 4 when the display (2) 4 is provided on the top of the side wall of the panel housing 20, 40, a structure in which the protective film 20b is omitted can be made. At this time, the thickness of the chassis 16 can be thickened to serve as a protective film. And. In the figure, the "B" part of the boundary is coated with an adhesive, which can lead to a sealing effect (no protective film can be used to give the adhesive a sealing effect instead).
  • the intermediate support part 30 is provided to support the input device 250.
  • the intermediate support part 30 is present in the non-display area of the display 2 joint part 8. Therefore, the intermediate support portion 30 has a width of at least 0.16mm to at most 2.5mm or 3.5mm, as described in FIG. 8.
  • FIG. 16 shows that the display 2 with the input device 250 is mounted to the panel housing 20
  • FIGS. 17 and 18 show that the display 2 and the input device 250 are separate from the panel housing 20. It is divided into and it is a figure which shows that each is mounted.
  • the third support part 26c is provided on the side wall 20a adjacent to the display so that the third support part 26c supports the display 2, and the display 2 is The input device 250 is supported.
  • the fourth support part 26d is further provided on the side wall 20a of the panel housing 20. To support the input device 250.
  • the width of the fourth support part 26d also has a value of at least 0.16 mm to at most 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm. That is, the fourth support part 26d is present in the screen non-display area at the joint part of the display 2.
  • the screen non-display area is a non-display area in one display (mounted in the chassis), the screen non-display area when the two displays are adjacent to each other is within 5 mm or 6 mm.
  • the thickness of the side wall of the panel housing 20 joint is 1.5 mm at maximum and the thickness of the chassis 16 is increased. It can be about 1mm. Therefore, the sum of the thickness of the chassis 16 that surrounds the display 2 seam side and the thickness of the side wall of the seam side of the panel housing 20 is 2.5 mm.
  • the thickness of the side walls 20a and 40a of the panel housing is 0.5 mm each (1 mm if the two side walls are combined)
  • the thickness of the chassis 16 is also 0.5 mm, respectively.
  • the distance between the displays 2 and 4 does not become 5 mm. In this case, the distance between the displays is 2 mm.
  • the panel housing sidewalls 20a and 40a and the display 2 and 4 are located slightly apart so that the distance between the displays 2 and 4 is 5 mm. Of course it can be. Similarly, even if the panel housing sidewalls 20a and 40a are thinner and the chassis 16 is thinner, the distance between the displays can be 5 mm.
  • the distance between the input devices may also be determined based on the distance between the displays, that is, the distance between the display and the input device may be the same.
  • the chassis is a part that surrounds the display in the form of aluminum, but in some cases it may be in the form of plastic appliances.
  • the chassis and the apparatus may be used together, and in all of these cases, the principle of covering the upper end of the joint part is in accordance with the present invention.
  • 19 shows the support means between the display and the input device.
  • the display 2 and 4 and the input device 250 are spaced apart at regular intervals, and the distance thereof may vary from 0.5 mm to 5 mm depending on the characteristics of the terminal. Therefore, it is necessary to separately support the input device, and this supporting means is shown in FIG.
  • the intermediate supporting part 30 and the fourth supporting part 26d have the same shape, the intermediate supporting part serves to support the input device 250 at the top of the display 2, and the fourth supporting part 26d is It is formed on the side wall 20a of the panel housing 20 to support the input device 250.
  • FIG. 7 to 18 illustrate and illustrate one display 2, 4, and panel housing 20, 40 for convenience, the left and right symmetry around the seam 8, that is, the boundary portion. It goes without saying that another display and panel housing in place can be provided on the same principle.
  • 19 is a view showing the shape of the intermediate supporting part 30, but it can be said that the shape of the fourth supporting part 26d is similar.
  • the width "W" of the center portion is 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm or less in the non-display area of the present invention.
  • 20, 21 and 22 are views showing the supporting means in the form of another intermediate plate of the display and the input device.
  • the support means uses a transparent plastic plate.
  • Transparent plastics include, for example, polycarbonate (PC) and polyethylene terephthalate (PET).
  • the intermediate support plate may be made of a transparent plastic plate having a thickness of the distance from the display 2 (or the chassis 16) to the input device 250, or as shown in FIG.
  • the plate 30a may be mounted to the display 2 and the chassis to serve as a supporting role.
  • "I” refers to one width of a wave pattern, and may have a size of about 0.2 to about 10 times the height "H". And, the height "H” is the height corresponding to the gap between the display (2) 4 and the input device 250.
  • the joint portion 8 may be provided with an intermediate plate 30b of the form of FIG. 21 made of a constant thickness and the other portion thinned.
  • the height "H” corresponds to the distance between the display (2) 4 and the input device 250
  • the constant width "Z” refers to the width enough to effectively support the input device in the joint portion.
  • the value of "Z" is determined within 0.2 to 20 times of "H".
  • FIG. 23 shows a display with a connector attached.
  • Conventional displays and input devices are provided with a connector for connecting with the terminal body, in the present invention is to change the design of the connector.
  • the display 2, 4 and the input device 250 is provided to have a symmetrical structure with respect to the joint portion (8).
  • a flexible printed circuit (FPC) 2c, 4c, 250c connecting the display device and the input device with the connectors 2d and 250d is provided, wherein the connectors 2d and 250d and the FPC are provided.
  • (2c) (4c) 250c are mounted on opposite sides of the joint.
  • the connector 250d of the input device 250 may be connected to the junction portions 2e and 4e of the display 2 and 4 through a solder or the like.
  • the connection between the input device 250 and the main body is also solved by the connection between the connectors 2d and 4d of the display 2 and 4 and the main body.
  • the display connectors 2d and 4d may include the function of the input device connector.
  • the external signal line FPC is connected to one side of the display and the input device, and the external signal line is connected to one side of the opposite side of the joint shown in each of FIGS. 12 to 18.
  • the input device 250 When connecting the external signal line (FPC) to the, it is possible to select one side of the other three sides except the joint (8).
  • 24 to 26 are views illustrating the shape of a display panel according to still another embodiment.
  • the part where the drive driver 2k (drive IC semiconductor chip) is located turns into a 4th side when a 1st side is a joint part.
  • the portion where the drive driver 2k is located becomes the upper side or the lower side.
  • the supply line 2i connected to the panel electrode 2f on the first side or the third side is connected to the fourth side. That is, the supply line 2i is divided into one side and three sides to reach the fourth side. At this time, the supply line 2i is an electrical wire for connecting to the driving driver 2k to supply a signal line.
  • the electrode 2f is simply expressed, but may actually mean a pixel electrode that transmits a driving signal to a TFT (Thin Film Transister).
  • a margin of 1.5 mm is further added to the value of 2 mm, which is the sum of the value of "J" and "k” shown in FIG. That is, to secure a distance for the supply line 2i to pass within the 1,5mm. Therefore, the distance from the pixel closest to the display seam 8 to the boundary of the display 2 and 4 is preferably no more than 3.5 mm.
  • connection supply line 25 is a view of another embodiment in which the connection supply line is changed.
  • the supply line 2i does not pass in the first side in order to minimize the joint. Then, all the supply lines 2i pass through the third side opposite to the seam 8, and the supply lines 2i meet the driving driver 2k.
  • the distance from the pixel closest to the joint portion 8 to the boundary line of the display 2 and 4 can be 2.0 mm at the maximum.
  • the rate at which the supply line 2i passes can be distributed to the third side and the first side at a constant ratio, respectively.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram in which two displays are arranged.
  • the drawing illustrates an in-cell method in which the input devices 200 and 400 are mounted directly on the upper side of the display 2 and 4, and the driving driver is provided when the joint 8 is right (or in some cases left).
  • FPC (2c) (4c) or the external connection connector (2d) (4d) to be connected to the lower side may be the upper side in some cases).
  • the FPC 250c and the connector 250d for connecting the input device are also positioned below.
  • the input device connector can be mounted on three sides except for the joint portion.
  • 27 to 30 are block diagrams illustrating the present invention.
  • two displays 2 and 4 are provided, and two input devices 250-1 and 250-2 are also provided, and an input device is provided on the top of the display.
  • the present invention is provided with a control unit for controlling the two display (2) (4), and also controls the signals output through the two input devices (250-1) (250-2).
  • the controller 110 As shown in FIG. 27, the controller 110, a memory 120, a time controller 125, a display driver 130, an input device driver 140, and the like are provided in the main body controller 105. .
  • each element that functions as the controller 110, the memory 120, the time controller 125, the display driver 130, and the input device driver 140 may be provided in the main body controller 105. It can be manufactured and provided as a part of.
  • the display driver 130 divides the screen and sends data to the first display 2 and the second display 4, respectively.
  • the input device driver 140 also corrects and adjusts signals output from the first input device 250-1 and the second input device 250-2, respectively.
  • the source (2b) (4b) section for providing a data signal and the gate section (2c) (4c) for providing a line selection signal Will be present.
  • the senor 135 is a sensor that promotes the coupling state of the panel housing 2 and 40. In other words. It is detected whether the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are coupled in a stacked state.
  • the driver 130 includes a column data processor 131 and a row data processor 132.
  • a method of dividing a display screen into two may be divided into source data and a gate signal.
  • the column data processing unit 131 for supplying source data supplies the same data signal to the first display 2 and the second display 4, and the raw data processing unit (Gate signal).
  • the signal is divided and supplied to the first display 2 and the second display 4.
  • the degree of division is usually 1: 1 (120 lines each for the first second display if the entire screen is 240 lines), but the ratio may be adjusted according to the terminal design. For example, various ratios can be adjusted to the 140 lines of the first display and the 100 lines of the second display.
  • the raw data processing unit (Gate signal) 132 supplies the same data signal to the first display 2 and the second display 4, and supplies the source data (data signal on the screen).
  • the supplied column data processing unit 131 divides and sends a signal to the first display 2 and the second display 4, respectively.
  • 30 is a detailed view of the input device driver 140.
  • the calibration function performing unit 141 performs a calibration function on the input device 250 when the system is initially operated. According to a calibration function performed by the calibration function performing unit 141, a signal of a panel (a portion where information is directly input from the input device) corresponding to the correct coordinate value of the input device 250 is selected.
  • the input device 250 signal corresponding to the coordinate value is selected according to the resolution of the display 2 and 4 (the number of lines of the source and the gate), and the selected signal is provided to the controller 110. Accordingly, the controller 110 stores and manages the coordinate values corresponding to the panel signal.
  • the average value detection frequency adjusting unit 143 adjusts the average value detection frequency for the panel signal output from the input device 250 based on the screen resolution information of the display device 2 or 4 provided from the control unit 110.
  • the average number of times of detection is adjusted to be larger than a previously set value.
  • the average number of times of detection is adjusted to be smaller than a previously set value.
  • the average value detector 142 detects the average value of the panel signal transmitted from the input device 250 based on the average value detection frequency adjusted by the average value detection frequency adjustment unit 143. The detected average value is transmitted to the adjusted panel signal generator 144.
  • the adjusted panel signal generator 144 uses the average information of the position information of the display screen changed by the changed screen resolution or the virtual scroll of the display apparatus 2 or 4 provided from the controller 110 and the currently input panel signal. To generate an adjusted panel signal.
  • the first input device 250-1 and the second input device 250-2 are provided. Therefore, the input device driver 140 controls the signal of the first input device 250-1. Signal control of the second input device 250-2 is performed.
  • the first input device 250-1 and the second input device 250-2 alternately control the input device driver 140 by the control of the time controller 125 and the controller 110. )).
  • Alternatingly connecting means processing the signal generated by the first input device 250-1 and then processing the signal generated by the second input device. 1) It processes the signal of 250-2.
  • this time division is divided into very small time, such as one tenth of a second to one thousandth of a second or one millionth of a second, so that when a user inputs information by a human hand, it can cope with enough.
  • the signal of the input device may be alternately processed as in the embodiment of the present invention, but it is natural that the input device 250-1 and 250-2 may be respectively provided to control and process the input device signal. Do.
  • 31 is a flowchart showing the present invention.
  • the main body control unit 105 is also operated to drive each device (step 400).
  • the controller 110 in the main body controller 105 divides the screen display data or the received screen display data stored in the memory 120. In this case, the function is controlled by the control unit 105 and the display driver 130. The controller 125 performs this operation (see the description of FIGS. 28 and 29).
  • the main body controller 105 divides the screen and transmits screen data information corresponding to the first display and the second display, respectively (step 302).
  • the input device driver 140 drives the first input device 250-1 by the switching device 145 of FIG. 30. That is, it controls the information output from the first input device (step 404) and controls the information output from the first input device according to the screen display information of the first display 2 (step 406).
  • the method of controlling the input device according to the display information follows the method of FIG. 30.
  • the switching device 145 controls the input device driver to output an output signal from the second input device (step 408), and controls the signal of the second input device according to the screen display information of the second display. Step) This step also follows the method of FIG.
  • the main body controller continuously divides the screen and drives each input device, but if there is a stop command, the series of performing functions ends (steps 412 and 414).
  • the input device driver controls the information output from the first input device according to the screen information of the first display and controls the information output from the second input device according to the screen information of the second display.
  • the two input devices are controlled as one input device.
  • 32 is a diagram illustrating a state before the screen is expanded by sliding.
  • the display 2 mounted on the panel housing 20 located above is shown. Then, the speaker 101 used during the call and the microphone 102 used during the phone call are mounted so that the mobile phone functions in the above state. In addition, the selection button 100 or the like is also mounted.
  • a separate speaker may be mounted on the 100 object.
  • a protective cover 51 serving as a cover for protecting the side of the joint 8 of the display 2 is provided.
  • 33 is a view showing a state of sliding in the left and right directions.
  • another cover 23 is provided on the opposite side of the joint 8 in the upper panel housing 20, and the protective cover 23 protects the side of the joint 8 of the lower display 4.
  • the cover 23 formed in the outer wall shape provided on the upper panel housing 20 protects the side surface of the lower display 4, and the cover 51 provided on the lower panel housing 40 is the upper display 2. Protect the seam side of the.
  • the inner side 51a of the cover or outer wall 51 protects the side of the seam of the upper display 2.
  • the protective cover 23, 51 protects the side surfaces of the display 2 and 4 joints while the upper and lower displays overlap, and the side surfaces of the display 2 and 4 joints are moved when the upper and lower displays slide. There is no protection.
  • the protective covers 23 and 51 protecting the side surfaces of the joints 2 and 4 move together.
  • 34 is a view showing a state in which the sliding movement in the vertical direction.
  • the upper and lower displays 2 and 4 have the same height and are adjacent to each other.
  • 35 and 36 are views illustrating a state in which the upper and lower panel housings are separated.
  • FIG. 35 shows the upper panel housing 20
  • FIG. 36 shows the housing 50 and the lower panel housing 40.
  • the sliding protrusion 21 provided in the upper panel housing 20 is coupled to the sliding groove 50a, thereby coupling and sliding the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40.
  • the grooves 50a provided on both side surfaces of the lower panel housing 40 that is, the inner sidewalls of the housing 50, have a curved shape at the joint portion 8. Therefore, when the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 move vertically, the curved panel moves.
  • 37 is a view showing a sliding structure.
  • FIG. 37 The figure above the arrow in FIG. 37 is a figure with the upper and lower displays 2 and 4 superimposed, and the figure under an arrow is a figure with the display unfolded.
  • the sliding groove 50a has a curved shape in the joint portion 8
  • the panel housings 20 and 40 move linearly when they move left and right, but when they move up and down, they move. .
  • the inner surface 51a of the lid 51 or the cover 23 provided on the upper panel housing may have a shaving curved surface shape, and thus the panel housing 20 which abuts with the inner surfaces of the lids 51 and 23 (
  • the side walls 20a and 40a of the 40 also have a curved shape.
  • the side walls 20a and 40a are portions having seams.
  • 38 to 40 are views of an embodiment in which the lower panel housing is slidingly moved.
  • FIG 38 is a view showing the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 overlapping each other. In the overlapped state, the speaker 101 and the microphone 102 which are used at the time of making a call are provided.
  • a handle 45 is provided on the protective cover 43 that protects the side surface of the joint 8 of the upper display 2.
  • the handle 45 has a long protrusion or a long groove shape on the surface of the cover 43 so as to be easily held by the hand when the outer wall or the cover 43 is gripped and moved by hand.
  • cover 43 connected to the lower panel housing 40 protects the side surface of the joint part 8 of the upper display 2.
  • the protective cover 43 does not protect the upper display seam 8 side.
  • the sliding protrusion 50a formed on the inner surface of the housing 50 also has the shape of a curvature. In other words, when the lower panel housing 40 moves left and right, the linear panel moves, but when the lower panel housing 40 moves, the lower panel housing 40 performs the curved motion.
  • the inner surface of the cover 43 has a curved shape
  • the side wall of the joint portion of the panel housing 20 which contacts the inner surface of the cover 43 also has a curved shape.
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram with the display fully extended. That is, in the state where the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 overlap (FIG. 38), the lower panel housing 40 slides in the left and right directions (FIG. 39), and then the two panels (2) are curved in the upward direction. 4 is fully expanded, resulting in two displays 2 and 4 having the same height (FIG. 40).
  • 41 through 52 are diagrams of yet another embodiment.
  • 41 is a view of another embodiment in which the panel housing is in a stacked state.
  • the upper panel housing slides in the direction of arrow A, and the seam 8 of the upper display 2 is protected by the lid 43.
  • the cover 43 is not covered by the joint part 8, and the lower display 4 mounted on the lower panel housing 40 is visible.
  • 43 is a diagram with two displays fully extended.
  • the lower cover 43a is configured to move in the vertical direction from the side of the lower panel housing 40. That is, when the lower cover 43a slides downward, the upper panel housing 20 on the top of the lower cover 43a also moves downward.
  • the lower cover 43a is provided at the side of the lower panel housing 40 to protect the seam 8 of the lower display 4.
  • the lower display 4 does not protect the seam, and as a result, the upper and lower displays 2 and 4 are adjacent to each other.
  • 44 and 45 are views illustrating a state in which the upper panel housing is removed.
  • a projection plate 71 is provided on the upper end of the lower cover 43a as a sliding means.
  • the protrusion plate 71 allows the upper panel housing 20 to slide while supporting the upper panel housing 20, and the protrusion 72 plays a role in sliding movement.
  • the basic structure of the embodiment of the present invention is that the plate-shaped structure made of metal, alloy or reinforced plastic supports and moves the upper panel housing.
  • the protrusion plate 71 is firmly fixed to the upper end of the lower cover 43a through the plate fixing part 75.
  • the fixing portion 75 is fixed through the projection plate groove 73 provided in the projection plate 71, the projection plate groove 73 is formed in the recess 74.
  • the recessed portion 74 is formed lower than the surface of the protrusion plate 71 so that the fixing portion 75 fixed to the protrusion plate 71 does not become higher than the surface of the protrusion plate 71.
  • the projection plate 71 and the fixing portion 75 which is a sliding means is made of a metal or alloy, etc. to make it durable.
  • a leg 20b is provided below the upper panel housing 20 so as to be formed higher than the bottom surface of the upper panel housing. Therefore, a space in which the protrusion plate 71 is slid and moved in the bottom portion of the upper panel housing 20 is made.
  • a bottom groove 80 is formed at the bottom of the upper panel housing 20, and the protrusion 72 of the protrusion plate 71 is engaged with the bottom groove 80 so as to slide.
  • bottom groove 80 is made by the bottom plate (81).
  • 47 and 48 are views of the bottom plate removed from the upper panel housing.
  • Steps 84 are provided at the bottom of the upper panel housing to form a predetermined space and a hook 83 is formed in the formed space, and a ring 82 formed behind the bottom plate 81 is firmly fixed to the hook 83.
  • 49 and 50 are views with the lower cover removed.
  • the vertical movement means provided in the joint portion of the lower panel housing 40 appears.
  • the vertical movement means allows the lower cover 43a to slide in the upper and lower directions in the lower panel housing 40.
  • the vertical movement means is composed of a support plate 90, the spring device 91 is further provided on both sides of the support plate 90. Inner grooves 90a are provided at both sides of the support plate 90, and an inner bottom 92 is also provided.
  • 51 and 52 are views showing the coupling portion of the lower cover.
  • Cover spaces 94 are formed on both side surfaces of the lower cover 43a, and coupling portions 95 are provided in the cover space 94.
  • the coupling portion 95 is formed of a head 95a and an attachment portion 95b, and the coupling portion 95 is fixed to the internal space 94 through the attachment portion 95b. It will be fixed with adhesives, screws, engaging projections, etc. on the marked part.
  • the coupling portion 95 is engaged with the inner groove (90a) on both sides of the support plate 90 to move.
  • the movement of the coupling portion 95 is limited by the inner bottom 92.
  • the lower lid 43a is prevented from falling downward more than necessary.
  • the spring 91 will be able to easily move back to the lower cover (43a).
  • 53 is a sectional view of two panel housings.
  • the panel housings 20 and 40 may have different thicknesses.
  • the upper panel housing 20 may have a thinner structure.
  • the panel housings 20 and 40 serve as cases in the portable display device.
  • the display 2 and the input device 200 are directly provided on the upper portion of the bottom portion of the thinly formed panel housing 20 (indicated by the arrows "0" in the drawing).
  • parts such as a battery or a main body control unit are provided in the main body part 25 provided at the lower part of the display of the panel housing 40 formed thickly.
  • the supporting parts 26 and 46 supporting the display 2 and the like may be provided.
  • Fig. 54 is a sectional view when the two panel housings have similar thicknesses.
  • FIG. 12 also shows a cross-sectional view of one panel housing 20 for convenience of illustration. The reason for this is that another panel housing 40 is similarly provided to form a symmetrical structure.
  • the symmetrical structure does not mean that even the parts mounted on each panel housing are the same. That is, the display 2, 4, the input device 200, 400, and the parts related to the display and the input device are provided in both panel housings 20, 40.
  • parts such as the main body control unit 105 and the battery (not shown for convenience) shown in FIG. 27 need not be provided in both panel housings.
  • the battery 25 is mounted, and the main body control part 105 can be mounted to the other parts 45.
  • a protective film 14 may be provided between the two displays 2 and 4, but as shown in the previous embodiment, the display 2 and 4 may be provided.
  • the panel housing sidewalls 20a and 40a may be provided between them.
  • the thickness of the panel housing sidewall is preferably not more than 1.5mm.
  • 55 to 57 show an embodiment with a frame housing.
  • the lower panel housing 20 is equipped with a battery or a main body circuit portion, and a frame housing 20-1 or a bracket 20-1 is mounted on the upper panel housing. At this time, the display is mounted on the frame housing 20-1.
  • the display 2 When the display 2 is mounted on the frame housing 20-1, the display 2 is mounted closer to the joint 8.
  • the seam is a portion where the displays 2 and 4 are interconnected. That is, when a portion of the display 2 on which the screen is displayed is called an active area 2-1, the active area 2-1 is larger than the opposite side of the joint of the frame housing 20-1. It is mounted closer to the seam 8.
  • the protection plate or the input device 200 is mounted on the top.
  • the area in which information can be input from the input device 200 may be referred to as an active area 200-1, which is indicated by white color at 200 in FIG. 55.
  • the active area 200-1 of the input device is also mounted closer to the seam than to the seam opposite.
  • FIG. 55 the L-L direction cross section is FIG. 56, and the K-K direction cross section is FIG. 57.
  • a protective plate or an input device is mounted around the frame housing 20-1.
  • the supporting part 30-1 is mounted between the display 2 and the frame housing to support the display or absorb shock.
  • the lower part of the frame housing 20-1 may be partially cut. (As shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, as indicated by D, the cut may be possible.)
  • the panel housing 20 having a low height is directly mounted on the lower portion of the panel housing 20.
  • a support part 30-1 may be provided between the panel housing lower portion and the display 20.
  • the support part may also serve as a protective plate for absorbing shock.
  • the protective plate 30-1 may be provided as a whole between the panel housing display, or may be partially provided between the display and the panel housing.
  • the distance between the lower panel housing 20 and the display 2 is within 2mm.
  • the length H1 from the bottom of the panel housing to the protective plate or the input device 200 is also within 10 mm.
  • the display can be within 1.5mm, the panel housing thickness within 1mm, and the input device including the protective plate within 1.5mm in thickness.
  • H1 can be within 4mm and within 5mm. That is, the size of H1 may be different depending on the case of a mobile phone and a tablet PC.
  • the display may be mounted directly under the panel housing 20, in which case the distance between the panel housing lower and the display is 0 mm.
  • the height H2 of the thicker panel housing may be within 8-12 mm or 16-25 mm depending on the situation.
  • H1 is 3-5mm and H2 is 7 15mm, the ratio of H1 / H2 is 0.20 (3/15) to 0.71 (5/7).
  • the protection means 14 is provided in the portion where the display is interconnected, the protection means may be a separate protective plate or a protective film, may be a side wall connected to the panel housing 20, 40, frame housing ( It may also be a side wall connected to 40-1).
  • the thickness of the perforated plate or the side wall at the portion where the display is connected and the arrangement of the display and the input device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 59 to 62 illustrate a method of mounting a display.
  • the OLED element does not have a backlight 2b.
  • the driver circuit is omitted for convenience of illustration.
  • the display when the display is provided in the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1, the display may be provided in a state in which the display is mounted on the chassis or the apparatus as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60.
  • the driving part is a common part and thus is omitted from the description.
  • the display may be directly mounted to the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1.
  • an interval between the display 2 and the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1 may be 2 mm or less, and in some cases, no gap may be 0 mm.
  • the supporting plate (30-1) is provided between the intervals.
  • the display 2 when the display 2 is mounted directly to the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1, another embodiment of the OLED device can be considered. That is, the figure above the arrow in FIG. 62 shows that the OLED element can be mounted directly to the housing 20, 20-1.
  • the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1 can replace the function of the OLED lower substrate (No. 52 in FIG. 9).
  • the panel housing substrate or the frame housing substrate may be made of a metal material.
  • the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1 may replace one substrate of the OLED. By doing so, the thickness of the display device can be made thinner.
  • 63 is a diagram of an embodiment when using as a mobile phone.
  • the input keyboard 256 can be displayed on the screen when a telephone number or the like is input.
  • the screen is in the form of a plurality of boxes (Box), it is obvious that a number character symbol or the like is displayed in the box.
  • buttons 100 may be provided.
  • a separate speaker that can make a loud sound at the position of the button 100 may be provided.
  • 64 is a diagram of an embodiment when used for character input or the like.
  • the input keyboard 255 may be displayed on only one screen.
  • the input keyboard 255 displays a keyboard shape that can function as a keyboard input function in which both Korean alphabet and alphabet are displayed. Then, when the user touches a portion where a desired letter is displayed, the input apparatus 200 or 400 may recognize the information.
  • the capacitive type and the resistive type input devices are taken as an example, it is obvious that the input device for inputting information on a flat plate may be used as it is.
  • 65 is a flowchart illustrating an input keyboard mode according to a combined sensor.
  • the sensor 135 of FIG. 27 determines whether the panel housings 20 and 40 are coupled.
  • the coupled state means that the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 are stacked up and down.
  • step 455 When the display is selected to display the input keyboard on the screen (step 455), it is determined by the sensor 135 whether it is in the engaged state (step 460).
  • the type A keyboard is displayed on the screen (step 470). At this time, the type A keyboard is the type shown in the embodiment of FIG. If not, the B-type keyboard is displayed on the screen (step 465). At this time, the B-type keyboard is the type shown in the embodiment of FIG.
  • step 475 If the user selects to exit, the system is shut down (step 475).
  • 66 is a flowchart illustrating a coupling sensor.
  • step 485) it is determined whether the panel housings 20 and 40 are coupled by the sensor 135 shown in the block diagram of FIG. 27.
  • step 490 A screen format for driving one display is selected (step 490). If not combined, both displays are driven, and a screen format for driving two displays is selected. (Step 495)
  • the display device of the present invention can be used with only one screen and can be used with only two screens. Therefore, the screen format for displaying one screen and the screen format for displaying two screens are stored in the memory 120 of the main body controller 105 shown in FIG. 27. In addition, the controller 110 selects a screen format suitable for the detection of the sensor 135.
  • the controller 110 controls the screen display according to the selected screen.
  • the control mode when displaying one screen is different from the control mode when displaying two screens.
  • 67-70 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of FIGS. 49-52.
  • FIG. 67 is a view of yet another embodiment of a spring device. That is, the elastic support plate 91a in the form of a plate spring may be provided in the inner groove 90a on both sides of the support plate 90 as shown in the drawing.
  • Fig. 68 is a view showing another type of support plate. As shown in the figure, the inner bottom 92 provided below the support plate 90 is provided to allow some movement in the downward direction.
  • the bottom support plate 93 is further provided below the inner bottom 92, and the bottom groove 93a is provided in the bottom support plate 93.
  • a bottom spring 93b is formed in the groove 93a.
  • the inner bottom can be lowered down by a predetermined value () of FIG. 70.
  • the value should not exceed 1.5mm. Therefore, although the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 may be fully extended, the display heights may be the same. By allowing an error of about 1.5mm, it is possible to maintain stability from shocks or external shocks caused by the movement of the display device.
  • FIG. 69 is a view showing another embodiment of the coupling part, in which the shape of the coupling head 95a is changed to a protrusion shape. That is, the coupling protrusion 95c is formed, and the coupling protrusion 95c is coupled to the elastic support plate 91a of FIG. 67.
  • the upper and lower positions of the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are effectively fixed by the coupling protrusion 95c and the elastic support plate 91a.
  • the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are easily fixed in the upper and lower positions, and are not fixed in the intermediate stage positions.
  • 70 is a diagram illustrating an upper and lower error of the upper and lower panel housings. That is, the embodiment when the bottom support plate 93 is provided as shown in FIG. In principle, when the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are unfolded, the mutual heights of the displays 2 and 4 and the panel housings 20 and 40 are the same.
  • the value should not exceed about 2mm or 2.5mm. That is, it means that the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 go up or down by about 1.5 mm or 2 mm in the vertical movement, and then have the same height.
  • 71 to 72 are views illustrating a lower panel housing and a projection board according to still another embodiment.
  • the lower panel housing 20 when the lower panel housing 20 moves while supporting the upper panel housing 40, the lower panel housing 20 has a structure that further includes a plate-shaped moving support separately for rigidity.
  • the lower panel housing 40 is provided to support the upper panel housing 20 and move the lower panel housing 20 in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.
  • the projection means 76 is provided as the moving means.
  • the protrusion is made of steel, stainless steel or alloy as a metal material to increase the robustness.
  • the projection plate 76 which is another embodiment of the sliding means on the top of the lower cover (43a) is provided. Therefore, the upper panel housing 20 is mounted on the top of the projection board 76, and the projection board 76 may be provided with one or two fixing protrusions 76a, and up to about three depending on the situation. Can be.
  • the protruding plate 76 is slid outwardly in FIG. 72. That is, the projection board 76 has a structure that is made wider than the width (width) of the lower cover (43a).
  • the protrusion plate 76 substantially supports the upper panel housing 20, so that the width of the protrusion plate 76 is wider than the width of the lower cover 43a to make the upper panel housing 20 more firm. To support it.
  • 73 is a view showing the projection plate 76, and a fixing projection 76b is further provided below the projection plate.
  • the lower cover 43a supports the protrusion plate 76 through the fixing protrusion 76b.
  • 71 and 73 are embodiments of a principle in which the panel housing is slidably moved in the left and right directions, and the up and down movement is performed by the movement of the protective cover as in the embodiment of FIGS. 41 to 43.
  • 74 and 75 are views illustrating a principle in which the protrusion plate is slid.
  • a square groove 77 is provided in the lower cover 43a, and a leaf spring 77a is provided in the square groove as shown in the drawing.
  • FIG. 74 is a view illustrating a state in which the fixing protrusion 76b is slidably moved. Since the plate spring (77a) is provided so that the projection plate 76 is in the initial position and the later position, not in the middle position when sliding the top of the lower cover (43a).
  • FIG. 75 is a detailed view of the square groove 77.
  • the leaf springs 77a are provided at both sides of the square groove 77 provided in the lower cover 43a, and the fixing projections of the protrusion 76 are interposed therebetween.
  • 76b is made to slide. In the figure, the lower part of the projection board 76 is shown and shown.
  • the lower panel housing 40 described in the embodiments of FIGS. 71 to 75 is similar to the embodiment of the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 described in FIGS. 41 to 52 and FIGS. 67 to 70. Naturally, it can be applied as it is.
  • 76 is a view of still another embodiment in which the protrusion plate is slid.
  • a moving bar 78 and a moving shaft 78a are provided below the protrusion plate 76. Therefore, the protrusion plate 76 is moved from the upper portion of the lower cover 43a by the moving bar 78 and the moving shaft 78a.
  • 77 and 78 are views showing the principle of movement by the moving bar.
  • FIG. 77 is a view showing the projection board 76 with the moving bar 78
  • FIG. 78 is a view showing the movement of the projection board 76. As shown in FIG.
  • the left and right direction movement is shown in one step, and the up and down direction movement is shown in this step.
  • the left and right movements are moved by the movement bar 78 and the movement shaft 78a and are movable by the elasticity of the movement spring 78b.
  • the vertical movement is also moved by the movement bar 78 and the movement shaft 78a and is movable by the elasticity of the movement spring 78b.
  • the moving shaft 78a has an axis connecting the moving bar and the moving bar 78, and there is also an axis for fixing the moving bar 78 to the protruding plate 76, and the moving bar 78 is fixed to the panel housing 40. Of course, there is an axis.
  • 79 to 81 are views showing the lower part of the upper panel housing.
  • the bottom groove 80 is provided at the bottom of the upper panel housing 20, the bottom groove 80 is further provided with a fixing spring 81a, one at the front and one at the rear.
  • the fixed spring may be used in the form of a leaf spring.
  • the position of the upper panel housing 20 is fixed by the action of the fixing spring 81a.
  • a fixing spring close to E " acts to fix the upper panel housing 20
  • a fixing spring provided close to the joint 8 acts to fix the upper panel housing 20.
  • the upper panel housing 20 moves with the lower panel housing 40, the upper panel housing 20 is reliably positioned at a desired position by a spring action.
  • the fixing spring 81a is positioned between the two fixing protrusions 76a to further increase the firmness.
  • the portion denoted by E may be referred to as the end of the bottom groove 80, as well as serves to push the end portion (part denoted by E) fixing protrusion 76a of the bottom groove 80,
  • the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 and the projection plate 76 serves to determine the mutual position.
  • each design value reflects the design.
  • the present invention does not need to represent each design value one by one, but only represents the principle.
  • FIG. 80 is a view showing an embodiment in which the portion indicated by E in FIG. 79 is replaced with the moving support plate 81b.
  • a support spring 81c is provided on the rear side of the movable support plate 81b, and a support groove 81d on which the support spring 81c is mounted.
  • the fixing projection (76a) is located between the fixing spring 81a and the movable support plate (81b).
  • the moving support plate 81b may be pushed in the direction of the arrow. This is to give an error range that can adjust the degree of close contact between the two panel housings 20, 40, so as to withstand more impact.
  • FIG. 81 the state in which the two panel housings 20 and 40 are completely in contact with each other in FIG. 81 becomes a state in which the movable support plate 81b is not pushed in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 80, and the two panel housings 20 in 81. 40, the state in which the moving support plate 81b is pushed in the arrow direction is shown in FIG.
  • the a value is appropriate within 2.5mm. That is, the value a represents a range of distances between two panel housings 20 and 40 that can fall during vertical movement.
  • 82 to 84 are views of the embodiment provided with the side protuberances.
  • FIG. 82 is a view showing a side protrusion 79 provided with side protrusions 79a. That is, another form of protrusion plate for supporting the upper panel housing 20 in the lower panel housing 40.
  • the protrusions supporting the upper panel housing 20 are on the side, and thus the side protrusions 79a are provided on the side protrusions 79.
  • FIG. 83 is a view illustrating a form in which the width of the side protrusion board 79 is wider than the width of the lower cover 43a.
  • the fixing protrusion 76b is provided under the side protrusion plate 79. The side protrusion plate 79 is moved from the upper end of the lower cover 43a to the left and right directions by the fixing protrusion.
  • FIG. 84 is a view showing the upper panel housing 20 having side grooves. In order to engage the side projection (79a) it is provided with a side groove (86a) in the upper panel housing (20).
  • a lower space 85 is formed in the lower side of the upper panel housing 20, which is a space for moving the side protrusion plate, and the side grooves (bottom side 86) formed on both side surfaces of the lower space 85 ( 86a).
  • the side groove (86a) is further provided with a spring, such as a leaf spring, as in the previous embodiment, it is of course possible to ensure the position where the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing are mutually located.
  • the height of the protective covers 23 and 43 is lowered, and instead, the portion engaging with the protective covers 23 and 43 is also adjusted to the height.
  • the figure conceptually illustrates the principle of sliding movement, and the upper and lower panel housings 20 are slidably moved in the left and right directions in a stacked state, and are slidably moved in the vertical direction again.
  • the protective covers 23 and 43 are covered and mutually supported.
  • the height of the protective cover (23) (43) can be lowered to improve the design, and when the two panel housings (20) and (40) are unfolded, the upper panel housing (20) is more firmly supported. You can also build a structure to do it.
  • FIG. 86 to 88 illustrate the principle of movement of the projection board in the embodiment of FIG. 85.
  • FIG. 86 to 88 illustrate the principle of movement of the projection board in the embodiment of FIG. 85.
  • the projection board 76 is moved in the jaw direction and the vertical direction by the moving bar 78 and the moving shaft 78a.
  • the width of the protrusion 76 is wider than that of the protective cover 43a or the lid support 43b.
  • the protrusion 76 is supported more effectively than the upper panel housing 20. To do that.
  • the projection plate 76, the moving bar 78 and the parts integrally attached thereto are all made of an alloy of metal to enhance the robustness.
  • the lower panel housing 20 when the lower panel housing 20 moves while supporting the upper panel housing 40, the lower panel housing 20 further includes a plate-shaped moving support for robustness.
  • 89 to 91 are views of the embodiment in which the shape of the protective cover is changed.
  • the upper panel housing 20 has a structure that makes both edges longer. In doing so, the length of the protective cover 43 provided in the lower panel housing 40 is also shortened.
  • the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are stacked.
  • the upper panel housing 20 is moved in the direction of the arrow, the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are stacked.
  • both edges of the upper panel housing 20 are longer. That is, the length of the S "is as much as the width of the protective cover 43 when the degree of lengthening is S".
  • S ′′ may be formed shorter than the width of the protective cover.
  • the shape of the protective cover is designed and manufactured to engage with it. Various design variations are not shown for convenience.
  • the state moved downward in FIG. 90 is the state in which the two panel housings are fully unfolded in FIG. 91.
  • 92 and 93 are views illustrating the lower panel housing.
  • the drawing is a structure of the lower panel housing according to the embodiment of FIGS. 89 to 91. That is, the protrusion plate 76 is formed in a "-shape, and is further extended in both edge directions. Therefore, the position of the fixing protrusion 76a is also moved inward.
  • the lower cover 43a also extends in both edge directions to have a "-shaped shape.
  • FIG. 89 shows the state of 92, and when the protrusion 76 moves outward, the state of FIG. 90 becomes FIG. That is, as in the previous embodiment, the fixing protrusion 76a of the protrusion plate 76 supports and moves the upper panel housing 20.
  • FIG. 94 is a view of another embodiment where the spring assembly is coupled to the bottom plate of FIG. 46.
  • a bottom plate 330 (corresponding to reference numeral 81 in FIG. 46) is provided, and the bottom plate 330 is provided with a sliding protrusion 332 and a hinge hole 331. And plate 310 is further provided, the plate 310 is coupled through the bottom plate 330 and the spring assembly 320.
  • Fixing grooves 311 are provided at both sides of the plate 310, and a guide frame 314 is inserted into the fixing grooves 311.
  • the guide frame 314 is provided with a guide groove 314b and a guide step 314a.
  • the guide step 314a prevents the guide frame 314 from being separated from the fixing groove 311.
  • the spring assembly 320 is an elastic body that can be compressed and restored. In other words, when a force is applied, compression is possible, and when the applied force is released, the structure is restored. In some cases, of course, it can be made into a structure that allows expansion and restoration. That is, it is expanded when the force is applied and restored when the applied force is released, and various spring composites used in the conventional sliding cell phone can be applied to the spring assembly of the present invention.
  • the spring assembly 320 is coupled to the hinge hole 312 of the plate 310 through the hinge 313a, and coupled to the hinge hole 331 of the bottom plate 330 through another hinge 313b.
  • the hinge hook 321 of the spring assembly 320 is coupled to the hinges (313a) (313b).
  • the sliding protrusion 332 of the bottom plate 330 is inserted into the guide groove 314b of the guide frame 314 inserted into the fixing groove 311 of the plate 310.
  • FIG. 95 is a structural diagram illustrating a sliding principle of FIG. 94.
  • the plate 310 slides on both sides of the sliding plate 330 (corresponding to reference numeral 81 in FIG. 46 and hereinafter referred to as a bottom plate).
  • the spring assembly 320 serves in the middle.
  • the state shown on the left side of FIG. 95 is a view showing a state in which the spring assembly 320 is compressed, and the state shown on the right side is an expanded state (restored state). That is, the spring assembly 320 is compressed while the pressure is applied, and the plate 310 is positioned at one end of the bottom plate 330. Then, when the pressure is released, the spring assembly 320 is expanded so that the plate 310 is located at the other end of the bottom plate 330.
  • 96 is a view showing a plate and a support plate.
  • the supporting plate 300 of the drawing is positioned on the upper portion of the supporting portion 43a shown in FIGS. 41, 82, 83, 89, and the like.
  • the support plate 300 is coupled to each other through the plate 310 and the spring assembly 325 of another type, and the mutual sliding movement, the principle of sliding movement is similar to FIGS. 94 and 95. Accordingly, as shown in the drawing, the spring assembly 325 is coupled to the plate 310 and the support plate 300 through the hinges 305a and 305b and the respective hinge holes 304 and 316. At this time, the hinge hook 326 serves.
  • the sliding plate 315 and the groove support 317 is provided on both sides of the plate 310, as shown in the figure, the projection 315a is formed on the sliding support 315.
  • the guide frame 306 is mounted inside the groove support 317, and the guide frame 306 is provided with a protrusion 306a and a guide groove 306b.
  • a fixing groove 301 is provided at one side of the support plate 300, and a guide frame 302 is mounted to the fixing groove 301.
  • the guide frame 302 is provided with a guide groove 302b and a protrusion 302a.
  • the protrusion 302a serves to prevent the guide frame 302 from leaving the fixing groove 301.
  • the other side of the support plate 300 is provided with a sliding projection 303. At this time, the protrusion 303 is bent through the refracting portion 303a.
  • the protrusion 315a of the plate 310 is inserted into the guide groove 302b of the base plate 300 and slides, and the protrusion 303 of the base plate 300 is inserted into the guide groove 306b of the plate 310. Become sliding.
  • FIG. 97 is a view illustrating the sliding principle of FIG. 96.
  • the support plate 300 slides on the plate 310 to move.
  • the spring assembly 325 plays a role in the middle.
  • 97 is a view showing a state in which the spring assembly 325 is compressed
  • the state shown on the right is a view showing a restored state (state when the force applied to the spring is removed). That is, when pressure is applied, the spring assembly 325 is compressed while the support plate 300 is positioned at one end of the plate 310. When the pressure is released, the spring assembly 325 is expanded (restored) so that the support plate 300 is positioned at the other end of the plate 310.
  • 98 is a view showing a side plate provided on the base plate.
  • a side plate 307 is provided on one side of the support plate 300, and the side plate 307 is provided with a spring protrusion 307b protrusion and an insertion hole 307a.
  • the spring protrusion 307b and the insertion hole 307a are shown in the inner side of the side plate 307 but through a separate enlarged view. And the position of the spring protrusion 307b and the insertion hole 307a by the dotted line in the side plate 307 is shown.
  • the spring protrusion 307b is coupled to the side plate 307 by means such as a hinge or a screw nail. Further, a curved housing 308 surrounding the spring protrusion 307b and the insertion hole 307a is further provided, and the curved housing 308 is coupled to the side plate 307 by a coupling plate 308a.
  • the coupling plate 308a is coupled through a coupling portion 308b such as a screw or a hinge nail.
  • the spring protrusion 307b has a curved shape and is made of a metal body or plastic having elasticity, such as a spring, and may be slightly changed in shape by an applied force or pressure.
  • a coupling protrusion 97 and a protrusion head 97a are provided at a side surface of the lower panel housing 40, and the coupling protrusion 97 is inserted into the insertion hole 307a of the side plate 307. 97a is positioned between the spring protrusion 307b and the curved housing 308.
  • 100 is a principle diagram in which the panel housing moves by the projection head.
  • the spring protrusion 307b has a curved shape as shown in the drawing, but is made of a metal or plastic material having elasticity.
  • the projection head 97a is positioned between the spring protrusion 307b and the curved housing 308 so that the protrusion head 97a moves up and down along the curved shape. That is, curved housing 308.
  • the spring protrusion 307b, the side plate 307, and the supporting portion 43a all move downward, but the protrusion head 97a and the lower panel housing 40 do not move relatively downward.
  • the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 move upward and downward in a curve by the movement of the projection head 97a.
  • the protruding head 97a moves in the direction of the arrow, and of course, moves again in the direction opposite to the arrow.
  • the coupling protrusion 97 is also formed inside the side wall of the lower panel housing 40, the spring device 97b is wrapped as shown in the figure.
  • a jaw 97c is also provided to prevent the engaging projection 97 from escaping the side wall of the lower panel housing 40.
  • the projection head (97a) is able to move the surface of the spring projection (307b) of the curved shape. That is, the coupling protrusion 97 may move left and right about the side wall of the lower panel housing 40.
  • 101 to 103 are views illustrating a principle in which the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing move in the left, right, and up and down directions.
  • the bottom plate 330 is coupled to the lower portion of the upper panel housing 20, and the sliding groove 80 is inserted to allow the sliding protrusion 332 of the bottom plate 330 to be inserted into the guide groove 314b of the plate 310. It is provided. Although the groove is omitted in FIG. 101 for convenience, the groove 80 of FIG. 46 of the present invention may be referred to.
  • a plate 310 is provided below the bottom plate 330, and a spring assembly 320 is provided between the bottom plate 330 and the plate 310.
  • the support plate 300 is provided below the plate 310, and similarly, another spring assembly 325 is provided between the plate 310 and the support plate 300.
  • the support plate 300 is provided to be firmly fixed to the top of the support portion (43a) of the lower panel housing (40).
  • the base plate 300 when the base plate 300 is coupled with the base 43 (a), it is natural that it can be combined in various coupling forms using screws, hinges, grooves and protrusions.
  • the spring assemblies 320 and 325 are expanded (restored) and exist. That is, as described in FIGS. 95 and 97, the spring assemblies 320 and 325 are in an expanded state.
  • the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 are slidably moved in the left and right directions as illustrated in FIG. 102, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 are slidably moved according to the principles described in the description of FIGS. 94 and 96. That is, the bottom plate 300 and the plate 310 slides and moves, and the support plate 300 and the plate 310 slide. Each spring assembly 320 and 325 is then compressed, as described in FIGS. 95 and 97.
  • the sliding movement in the left and right directions is made possible by moving the fixing groove 311 through the bottom groove (80).
  • 104 is a view showing the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate.
  • the bottom plate 330 is connected to the lower portion of the upper panel housing 20 and mounted directly under the upper panel housing 20. Therefore, the bottom plate 330 is made of a material such as metal.
  • sliding protrusions 332 are formed at both ends of the bottom plate 330, and the bottom grooves 80 are formed to be movable by inserting and coupling the sliding protrusions 332 and the fixing grooves 311 of the plate 310.
  • 105 and 106 are views showing the principle of the path that the panel housing moves through the spring projection.
  • the upper panel housing 20 moves up and down with respect to the lower panel housing 40 in a direction opposite to the curved shape (arrow posh) shown on the right side. That is, when the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 move up and down, the linear panel moves in a curved motion rather than linearly. As a result, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 mutually move up and down. The distance will be close and then close again.
  • the distance to be separated is not good too large and usually 0.5mm is suitable, but may be from 1mm to 3mm. And this separation distance is determined by the size of the left and right width of the spring projection (307b).
  • 106 illustrates a spring protrusion 307b having a protruding curved shape, and thus the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 also move in the opposite direction.
  • the upper panel housing 20 moves below the lower panel housing 40, the upper panel housing 20 is positioned slightly higher than the lower panel housing 40 and then moves downward. Then, as a result, the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing come into close contact with each other at the same height.
  • the distance from the high position is usually about 0.5mm is enough, but within 3mm may be appropriate.
  • the protrusion 307d can be taken as a design structure that is easily contracted by adding a separate spring device.
  • 107 is a view showing the movement of the upper and lower panel housings.
  • the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are slidably moved in the left and right directions ((A) state in the drawing), and are in a state before moving in the vertical direction (B) state in the drawing. This movement takes place in the process of compressing the spring assembly 320, 325 by applying pressure.
  • the upper panel housing 20 is slightly raised and then moved downwards ((D) state in the drawing). In this case, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 move in a slightly spaced state. At this time, there is a suitable separation distance and may be very small as 0.05 mm, but 0.5 to 3 mm is suitable.
  • the display is in a state of being adjacent to each other ((E) state in the drawing).
  • This process can also be pressurized and reversed.
  • the state where the projection head 97a is located below in FIGS. 105 and 106 is the state (B) in FIG.
  • the state where the projection head 97a is located upward is the state (E) in FIG. 107. And this process can be repeated as pressure is applied and released.
  • 108-111 illustrate an embodiment of a spring assembly.
  • the two sliding bars 320b and 320c coupled to the coil spring 320a are mutually slid by the sliding means 320d, at which time the two sliding bars 320b and 320c are moved by the coil spring 320a. Can be mutually compressed and expanded. Naturally, one of the sliding bars 320b and 320c is coupled to the bottom plate 330 and the other to the plate 310.
  • 109 is a principle that allows the plate 310 to move using the inclined bar 327a and the compression spring 327. That is, when the pressure is applied to the plate 310 and pushed upward, the compression spring 327 is compressed by the inclined bar 327a. When the pressure is released, the compression spring 327 is expanded to expand the plate 310 by the sliding groove or the sliding bar. Through 335 is restored to the original position.
  • a spring assembly to enable compression and expansion by connecting a plurality of springs in the form of a semi-circular wire. That is, a plurality of semicircular wire springs 329b are connected to each other by a rotation hinge 329c to form a rotatable joint, and then, the fixing parts 329a and 329d are placed at both ends.
  • one of the fixing parts 329a and 329d is fixed to the plate 310 and the other to the bottom plate 330.
  • the wire spring 329b is compressed, and when the force is released, the wire spring 329c is expanded to expand the plate 310 and the bottom plate ( The position of 330 is to be restored.
  • FIG. 111 which is another embodiment of a semicircular spring structure, is an example of a spring structure used when two panel housings have a large moving distance.
  • 112 through 118 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of the sliding structure.
  • 112 to 115 are views illustrating the sliding movement principle.
  • the spring complex repeats the restoration in expansion or contraction in expansion, it is made of accessories such as spring and has the force to make the sliding movement by elastic force.
  • the support plate 340 is further provided, the support plate 340 and the plate 310 may be moved together as an integral part.
  • the shape of the support plate 340 may be deformed by applying the function of the protrusion plate 76 illustrated in FIGS. 92 and 93.
  • the backing plate 340 is mounted inside the lower panel housing 40 and moves to slide from the lower panel housing so that a part of the support plate 340 may come out.
  • the principle that the support plate 340 sliding out of the lower panel housing 40 can also be applied to the principle that the plate 310 and the spring composite 320 is moved, or a conventional guide structure and spring The device can be used.
  • the supporting plate 340 when it is partially out of the lower panel housing, it can make a structure that can support the supporting plate 340, this structure is the lower panel housing of Figure 85 to Figure 88 in the above embodiment The structure may be applied.
  • the support plate 340 comes out, and thus, the plate 310 connected to the support plate also comes out of the lower panel housing boundary (FIG. 114), where the support plate 340 also comes out of the panel housing.
  • the spring mounted on the backing plate is compressed or expanded.
  • the support plate 340 is in the lower panel housing 40.
  • the plate 310 moves downward, so that the plate 310 also moves downward, so that the upper panel housing 20 supported by the plate 310 also descends.
  • the principle of the support plate 340 to move down can be implemented using the pressing side or expansion of the spring and the moving guide component.
  • the spring used to move the support plate 340 is restored so that the upper panel housing is raised above the lower panel housing, and used to move in the left and right directions.
  • the springs of the supporting plate 340 and the plate 310 are also restored so that the upper and lower panel housings overlap in the original state.
  • FIG. 116 is a view for explaining a principle in which the upper and lower panel housings move by side movement.
  • the support part 43C which supports the support plate 340, and the moving means 341 which move and use the support plate 340 mutually are provided.
  • the moving unit 341 may be a component to which the principle of moving the plate and the bottom plate through the spring composite is applied.
  • one panel housing needs to have a thinner height in order to reduce the vertical movement distance.
  • the thinner structure of the panel housing can be applied to the embodiments of FIGS. 53 and 58.
  • 117 and 118 are views showing an outline of a lower panel housing state, and it can be seen that the shape of the protrusion 76 shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 is applied to the previous embodiment.
  • 117 shows that the plate 310 and the support plate 340 are connected in one piece, and the support 43C moves downward, so that the support plate 340 moves downward.
  • 117 is without the middle part of 23C of FIG.
  • the lid 23 described in FIG. 37 should be provided in the upper panel housing, and the use thereof is the same as the lid 23 of FIG.
  • FIG. 118 shows the backing plate 340 and plate 310 moving out of the lower panel housing boundary. As the structure moves outward, the upper panel housing can be moved downward.
  • 119 and 120 are views of an embodiment provided with an extension.
  • the extension portion 345 is a structure that is capable of sliding movement through the spring device and the guide means in the both sides of the upper panel housing 20. Accordingly, in the state where the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing overlap, the extension part 345 enters the upper panel housing 20, and in the unfolded state, the extension part 345 comes out.
  • 121 is a view showing an example of a coupling unit.
  • engaging means 55, 55a or the locking means 55, 55a for maintaining the state in which the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing are unfolded and then the same height.
  • the upper and lower panel housings are provided with protrusions or grooves in contact with each other when the upper and lower panel housings are unfolded at the same height so as to have a coupling bearing force.
  • FIG. 121 it is a figure which shows the position of the engagement means or the locking means 55 and 55a, and it does not matter where the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing contact actually.
  • the object of the present invention can be achieved by taking the form of the groove and the protrusion to engage with each other.
  • 122 and 123 are views of another embodiment in which the lower panel housing is moved.
  • FIG. 122 is a view illustrating a principle in which the lower panel housing 40 in the housing 50 slides in the left and right directions and moves in the upper direction so that the two panel housings are unfolded.
  • the bottom panel 81-1 is provided in the lower upper panel housing, the fixing groove 350 is moved through the projections on both sides of the bottom plate 81-1. .
  • the support plate 351 is formed integrally with the fixing groove 350 is provided with an extension support plate 352.
  • the extended support plate 352 is further extended so that the lower panel housing 40 comes out of the boundary of the upper panel housing 20.
  • the lower panel housing 40 moves upward through the spring devices 353 and 353a.
  • the moving means 352a is a spring composite to allow the support plate 351 and the extended support plate 352 to move left and right.
  • the bottom plate 81-1 and the fixing groove 350 are used. And, when the lower panel housing 40 comes out of the upper panel housing 20 boundary, the support plate 351 and the extended support plate 352 are used. In addition, the spring device (353, 353a) is used when the lower panel housing 40 is moved upward.
  • the embodiment of Fig. 112 to 118 is the spring when the panel housing 20, 40 is expanded to the same height (Fig. 115) when the spring is in an expanded or compressed state, the panel housing is overlapped (Fig. 112) The spring is in a restored state.
  • FIGS. 122 and 123 show the spring in the expanded or compressed state when the panel housing overlaps, and the spring in the restored state when the panel housing is unfolded.
  • FIG. 112 to 118 when the panel housing 20 and 40 are unfolded at the same height, the locking means or the coupling means (described in FIG. 121) is required to maintain the state.
  • FIG. 122 and FIG. 123 need to have a locking means or a coupling means (described in FIG. 121) when the two panel housings overlap to maintain the state.
  • the compression inflation or restoring state of the spring may be reversed, resulting in a restoring state of the spring when FIGS. 112 and 118 are in the extended state in the embodiment. That is, when the locking means or the coupling means is in a compressed or expanded state, the upper and lower panel housings may be provided at positions where they are in contact with each other to serve as a locking function.
  • the action of the engaging means or the securing means can be seen by the movement of the two panel housings in FIG. That is, when the two panel housings touch each other, a little wider space is brought into contact with each other.

Abstract

The present invention relates to a portable display apparatus, configured such that an upper panel housing and a lower panel housing stacked in a vertical direction spread so as to interconnect two display units and thus form a single screen. To set the two display units which were stacked at the same height, sliding means which slide in the left and right directions and moving means which move in the upward and downward directions are effectively provided. For this purpose, the portable display apparatus of the present invention comprises: at least two upper and lower panel housings stacked into a layer; and display units mounted on the upper and lower panel housings, respectively, wherein the upper and lower panel housings are slidable in the left and right directions and movable in the upward and downward directions relative to one another, such that display units mounted on the respective upper and lower panel housings are placed adjacently to one another. The gap between the display units is 0.1 mm to 5 mm when the display units are placed adjacently to one another, and a cover is arranged on the seam between the display units.

Description

휴대용 표시장치Portable display
본 발명은 두 개의 디스플레이를 이용하여 하나의 화면처럼 사용하는 방법에 관한 것으로, 더욱 상세하게는 디스플레이가 장착된 적어도 2 개 이상의 패널하우징을 적층상태로 구비하고, 상기 패널하우징을 슬라이딩 이동하면 상기 디스플레이가 0.1mm 이상 5mm 이내로 상호 연결되어 하나의 디스플레이처럼 사용할 수 있도록 하는 구조를 제공하는 것에 관한 것이다.The present invention relates to a method of using two displays as a single screen, and more particularly, to at least two panel housings equipped with a display in a stacked state, and when the panel housing is moved by sliding the display. The present invention relates to providing a structure in which the interconnections are connected to each other within 0.1 mm to 5 mm so that they can be used as a single display.
휴대용에서 화면을 크게 하기 위해서는 두 개의 디스플레이를 상호 연결하여 하나의 화면을 사용하는 것과 같은 효과를 가지도록 한다. 이때 사용되는 평판 디스플레이 패널로는 LCD, OLED, FED, PDP, 전자 종이(Electric Paper)등을 사용할 수 있다. 즉, 평판 디스플레이 구조를 가지면 다 사용 가능하다는 것이다.In order to enlarge the screen in portable, the two displays are interconnected to have the same effect as using one screen. In this case, a flat panel display panel used may include LCD, OLED, FED, PDP, and electric paper. In other words, any flat panel display can be used.
그리고, 이를 위해 슬라이딩 가능한 별도의 패널하우징을 구비하고 상기 패널하우징 각각에 디스플레이를 장착할 때, 디스플레이가 상호 인접되는 구조가 되도록 하는 것이다. In addition, for this purpose, a separate panel housing that is slidable is provided, and when the display is mounted on each of the panel housings, the displays are configured to be adjacent to each other.
또한, 디스플레이의 한 변을 효과적으로 설계하여 디스플레이 사이에 발생하는 화면 비표시영역인 이음매를 최소화한다. 이를 위해 한 변이 효과적으로 설계된 디스플레이를 서로 인접되도록 배치함으로서인 이음매가 최소화되는 것이다.In addition, by effectively designing one side of the display to minimize the seam, which is a non-screen display area generated between the display. To this end, the seams are minimized by arranging the displays effectively designed on one side to be adjacent to each other.
그러나, 디스플레이가 상호 슬라이딩 이동할 때 적층 상태에 있던 디스플레이가 같은 높이로 위치하게 하기 위해서는, 효과적인 슬라이딩 수단을 제공함은 물론 상하 이동 수단도 제공하여야 하지만 이러한 구성 요소를 제공하기 못하고 있는 실정이다. However, in order to position the displays in the stacked state at the same height when the displays are slid, the effective sliding means as well as the vertical movement means must be provided, but these components cannot be provided.
본 발명은 위 아래로 적층 상태에 있던 패널하우징이 펼쳐지면 두 개의 디스플레이가 서로 연결되어 하나의 화면을 형성할 수 있도록 함을 특징으로 하고 있으며, 적층 상태에 있던 디스플레이가 같은 높이로 위치하게 하기 위해서 좌우 방향의 슬라이딩 수단과 함께 상하 방향의 이동 수단도 제공하는데 그 목적이 있다.The present invention is characterized in that when the panel housing in the stacked state up and down is unfolded, the two displays can be connected to each other to form a single screen, so that the displays in the stacked state are positioned at the same height. It is an object to provide a moving means in the vertical direction together with the sliding means in the left and right directions.
본 발명은 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 상기 디스플레이가 상호 인접될 때, 상기 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내이며, 상기 디스플레이의 이음매부에 덮개가 구비된 것을 특징으로 한다. According to the present invention, at least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, respectively, and a display is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings, and the upper and lower panel housings are slidably moved in the left and right directions, respectively, and also in the vertical direction. In the portable display device in which the displays mounted on the upper and lower panel housings are adjacent to each other, when the displays are adjacent to each other, a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm, and a cover is provided at a joint of the display. It is characterized by.
그리고, 상부 패널하우징을 지지하는 지지부가 구비되며, 상기 지지부는 상부 패널하우징과 스프링 복합체를 통해 움직이며 힘을 가하면 압축 혹은 팽창되며, 힘이 풀어지면 복원 되며, 상기 하부 패널하우징에서 하부 디스플레이의 이음매부 측면을 덮는 하부 덮개가 구비되고 상기 하부 덮개는 상하 방향으로 이동 가능하다. In addition, a support unit for supporting the upper panel housing is provided, and the support unit moves through the upper panel housing and the spring complex and is compressed or expanded when a force is applied, and is restored when the force is released, and the seam of the lower display is connected to the lower panel housing. A lower cover is provided to cover the secondary side, and the lower cover is movable in the vertical direction.
한편, 상기 디스플레이는 플레임 하우징에 직접 장착되고, 상기 프레임 하우징 하단에는 표시장치 본체 부품이 구비되며, 상기 프레임 하우징에서 디스플레이가 연결되는 연결부가 구비되고, 상부 패널하우징을 지지하는 지지부가 구비되며, 상기 지지부는 하부 패널하우징 경계부 밖으로 나오는 것을 것을 특징으로 한다.On the other hand, the display is mounted directly to the flame housing, the lower portion of the frame housing is provided with a display device body parts, the connection portion is connected to the display in the frame housing is provided, the support portion for supporting the upper panel housing is provided, The support is characterized by coming out of the lower panel housing boundary.
또한, 두 개의 패널하우징에서 한 개의 패널하우징이 높이가 더 얇은 것을 특징으로 하고, 디스플레이 상단에 구비된 입력장치 사이의 거리도 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내인 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치.In addition, one panel housing in the two panel housings characterized in that the height is thinner, the portable display device, characterized in that the distance between the input device provided on the top of the display is within 0.1mm to 5mm.
디스플레이가 장착된 적어도 2 개 이상의 패널하우징이 서로 연결되도록 하여 하나의 화면을 형성함을 특징으로 할 때, 위 아래로 적층 상태에 있던 패널하우징이 펼쳐지면 두 개의 디스플레이가 서로 연결되어 하나의 화면을 형성할 수 있도록 함을 특징으로 하고 있으며, 적층 상태에 있던 디스플레이가 같은 높이로 위치하게 하기 위해서 좌우 방향의 슬라이딩 수단과 함께 상하 방향의 이동 수단도 효과적으로 제공할 수 있게 된다. When at least two panel housings equipped with a display are connected to each other to form a single screen, when the panel housings which are stacked up and down are unfolded, the two displays are connected to each other to connect one screen. It is characterized in that it can be formed, it is possible to effectively provide the moving means in the vertical direction along with the sliding means in the left and right directions in order to position the display in the stacked state at the same height.
도 1은 본 발명의 휴대용 표시장치를 나타낸 도면이다.1 illustrates a portable display device of the present invention.
도 2는 디스플레이가 상호 겹쳐져 적층된 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.2 is a diagram illustrating a state in which displays overlap each other and are stacked.
도 3은 디스플레이가 슬라이딩 이동한 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the display is slid.
도 4는 보호덮개를 제거한 패널하우징을 나타낸 도면이다.4 is a view illustrating a panel housing with a protective cover removed.
도 5는 디스플레이 위 부분에 입력장치가 구비되도록 하는 도면이다. 5 is a diagram illustrating an input device provided on an upper portion of a display.
도 6은 디스플레이(2)(4) 상단에 입력장치(250)가 장착된 상태의 도면을 나타낸다. FIG. 6 shows a diagram in which the input device 250 is mounted on the top of the display 2 and 4.
도 7은 디스플레이의 이음매부를 확대한 도면으로 도 5의 A 부분을 확대한 도면이다. FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a seam of a display and is an enlarged view of a portion A of FIG. 5.
도 8은 입력장치를 확대한 도면으로 도 5의 B 부분을 확대한 도면이다. FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of an input device and is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 5.
도 9는 디스플레이의 단면을 나타낸 도면이다.9 is a cross-sectional view of the display.
도 10은 입력장치가 장착된 디스플레이가 패널하우징에 장착되는 도면이다. 10 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
도 11은 디스플레이와 입력장치가 각각 별개로 패널하우징에 장착되는 도면이다.11 is a view in which the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
도 12는 입력장치가 구비된 디스플레이가 패널하우징에 장착된 경우의 단면도이다.12 is a cross-sectional view when a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
도 13은 디스플레이와 입력장치가 패널하우징에 분리되어 각각 장착되는 경우의 단면도이다.13 is a cross-sectional view when the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
도 14는 입력장치가 구비된 디스플레이가 패널하우징 측벽에 장착되는 도면이다. 14 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted on a panel housing sidewall.
도 15는 디스플레이와 입력장치가 패널하우징에 별개로 분리되어 각각 장착됨을 나타내는 도면이다. 15 is a view showing that the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing separately.
도 16 내지 도 18은 디스플레이와 입력장치가 패널하우징에 별개로 분리되어 각각 장착됨을 나타내는 도면이다.16 to 18 are views showing that the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
도 19는 디스플레이와 입력장치 사이의 지지수단을 나타낸 도면이다.19 shows the support means between the display and the input device.
도 20 내지 도 22는 디스플레이와 입력장치의 또 다른 중간판 형태의 지지수단을 나타낸 도면이다.20 to 22 are views showing support means in the form of another intermediate plate of the display and the input device.
도 23은 커넥터가 부착된 디스플레이를 나타낸 도면이다.23 shows a display with a connector attached.
도 24내지 도 26은 또 다른 실시예의 디스플레이 패널의 형상을 나타낸 도면이다.24 to 26 are views illustrating the shape of a display panel according to still another embodiment.
도 27에서 도 30까지는 본 발명의 블록도를 나타낸 도면이다.27 to 30 are block diagrams illustrating the present invention.
도 31은 본 발명의 순서도를 나타낸 도면이다. 31 is a flowchart showing the present invention.
도 32내지 도 37은 슬라이딩 구조의 또 다른 실시예를 나타낸 도면이다. 32 to 37 show another embodiment of the sliding structure.
도 38내지 도 40은 하부 패널하우징이 슬라이딩 이동되는 실시예의 도면이다.38 to 40 are views of an embodiment in which the lower panel housing is slidingly moved.
도 41내지 도 52는 슬라이딩 구조의 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.41 to 52 are views of yet another embodiment of a sliding structure.
도 53은 두 개 패널하우징의 단면도이다. 53 is a sectional view of two panel housings.
도 54는 두개 패널하우징의 두께가 비슷한 경우의 단면도이다. Fig. 54 is a sectional view when the two panel housings have similar thicknesses.
도 55 내지 도 57은 프레임 하우징을 구비한 실시예의 도면이다.55 to 57 show an embodiment with a frame housing.
도 58은 디스플레이가 상호 인접되는 구조를 나타낸 모양이다.58 shows a structure in which the displays are adjacent to each other.
도 59에서 도 62는 디스플레이가 장착되는 방법을 나타낸 도면이다.59 to 62 illustrate a method of mounting a display.
도 63은 휴대폰으로 사용할 경우의 실시예의 도면이다.63 is a diagram of an embodiment when using as a mobile phone.
도 64는 문자 입력 등으로 사용할 때의 실시예의 도면이다. 64 is a diagram of an embodiment when used for character input or the like.
도 65는 결합 센서에 따른 입력 자판 모드의 순서도를 나타낸 도면이다. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an input keyboard mode according to a combined sensor.
도 66은 결합 센서에 따른 순서도를 나타낸 도면이다. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a coupling sensor.
도 67내지 70은 도 49와 도 52의 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다. 67-70 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of FIGS. 49-52.
도 71내지 도 73은 또 다른 실시예의 하부 패널하우징과 돌기판을 나타낸 도면이다. 71 to 73 illustrate a lower panel housing and a projection board according to another embodiment.
도 74와 도 75는 돌기판이 슬라이딩 이동되는 원리를 나타낸 도면이다. 74 and 75 are views illustrating a principle in which the protrusion plate is slid.
도 76은 돌기판이 슬라이딩 이동되는 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다. 76 is a view of still another embodiment in which the protrusion plate is slid.
도 77과 도 78은 이동바에 의한 이동원리를 나타낸 도면이다.77 and 78 are views showing the principle of movement by the moving bar.
도 79내지 도 81은 상부 패널하우징의 하부를 나타낸 도면이다.79 to 81 are views showing the lower part of the upper panel housing.
도 82내지 도 84는 측면 돌기판이 구비된 실시예의 도면이다.82 to 84 are views of the embodiment provided with the side protuberances.
도 85는 보호 덮개의 높이를 낮게한 실시예를 나타낸 도면이다.85 is a view showing an embodiment in which the height of the protective cover is lowered.
도 86 내지 도 88은 실시예 도 85 실시예에서 돌기판이 움직이는 원리를 나타내는 도면이다.86 to 88 illustrate the principle of movement of the projection board in the embodiment of FIG. 85. FIG.
도 89내지 도 91은 보호 덮개의 형태를 변경한 실시예의 도면이다.89 to 91 are views of the embodiment in which the shape of the protective cover is changed.
도 92와 도 93은 하부 패널하우징을 나타낸 도면이다.92 and 93 are views illustrating the lower panel housing.
도 94는 도 46의 바닥판에 스프링 조립체가 결합된 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.FIG. 94 is a view of another embodiment where the spring assembly is coupled to the bottom plate of FIG. 46.
도 95는 도 94의 슬라이딩 원리를 나타낸 구조도이다. 95 is a structural diagram illustrating a sliding principle of FIG. 94.
도 96은 플레이트와 받침판을 나타낸 도면이다.96 is a view showing a plate and a support plate.
도 97은 도 96의 슬라이딩 원리를 나타낸 도면이다. 97 is a view illustrating the sliding principle of FIG. 96.
도 98은 받침판에 구비된 측면판을 나타낸 도면이다.98 is a view showing a side plate provided on the base plate.
도 99는 하부 패널하우징의 결합 돌기를 나타낸 도면이다. 99 is a view showing the engaging projection of the lower panel housing.
도 100은 돌기 머리에 의해 패널하우징이 움직이는 원리도이다.100 is a principle diagram in which the panel housing moves by the projection head.
도 101내지 도 103은 상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징이 좌 우방향과 상하 방향으로 이동하는 원리를 나타낸 도면이다.101 to 103 are views illustrating a principle in which the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing move in the left, right, and up and down directions.
도 104는 바닥판의 단면 모양을 나타낸 도면이다,104 is a view showing the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate,
도 105와 도 106은 스프링 돌기를 통해 패널하우징이 움직이는 경로의 원리를 나타낸 도면이다. 105 and 106 are views showing the principle of the path that the panel housing moves through the spring projection.
도 107은 상하부 패널하우징의 움직임을 나타낸 도면이다. 107 is a view showing the movement of the upper and lower panel housings.
도 108내지 도 111은 스프링 조립체에 대한 실시예를 나타낸 도면이다. 108-111 illustrate an embodiment of a spring assembly.
도 112에서 도 118은 슬라이딩 구조의 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.112 through 118 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of the sliding structure.
도 119와 도 120은 연장부가 구비된 실시예의 도면이다.119 and 120 are views of an embodiment provided with an extension.
도 121은 결합 수단의 한 예를 나타낸 도면이다. 121 is a view showing an example of a coupling unit.
도 122와 도 123은 하부 패널하우징이 이동하는 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.122 and 123 are views of another embodiment in which the lower panel housing is moved.
20, 40 : 패널하우징 2,4 : 디스플레이 20, 40: panel housing 2, 4: display
50 : 하우징 45 : 손잡이 50 housing 45 handle
43 : 보호덮개 20a, 40a : 측벽 43: protective cover 20a, 40a: side wall
16 : 샤시 250 : 입력장치 16: chassis 250: input device
2n : 인접화소 2f : 격벽 2n: adjacent pixels 2f: bulkhead
2g : 경계 250n : 리드선 2g: boundary 250n: lead wire
250f : 격벽 8 : 이음매부 250f: bulkhead 8: seam
51,52 : 기판 16d : 마스크 프린팅 51,52: substrate 16d: mask printing
26a, 26b, 26c, 26d : 받침부 20c : 단차 26a, 26b, 26c, 26d: base portion 20c: step
20d : 돌출부 24 : 상부 커버 20d: protrusion 24: top cover
20b : 보호필름 30 : 중간 받침부20b: protective film 30: intermediate support
30a,30b : 중간판 2k : 구동 드라이버30a, 30b: Intermediate plate 2k: Drive driver
2i : 공급선 200, 400 : 입력장치 2i: supply line 200, 400: input device
250-1, 250-2 : 입력장치 105 ; 본체 제어부250-1, 250-2: input device 105; Main body control unit
130, 140 : 구동부 135 : 센서 130, 140 driving unit 135: sensor
110 : 제어부 51 : 덮개 110: control unit 51: cover
50a ; 슬라이딩 홈 51a : 안쪽 측면 50a; Sliding Groove 51a: Inner Side
본 발명은 적어도 2 개 이상의 평판 디스플레이를 상호 연결하여 하나의 화면을 볼 수 있는 효과를 가지는 접이식 휴대용 표시장치를 제공한다. 평판 디스플레이 패널로는 LCD, OLED, FED, PDP, 전자 종이(Electric Paper)등을 사용할 수 있으나 여기에 한정되지 않고 평판 디스플레이 라면 모두 사용이 가능하다. The present invention provides a folding portable display device having an effect of viewing at least one screen by interconnecting at least two flat panel displays. As a flat panel display panel, LCD, OLED, FED, PDP, Electric Paper, etc. can be used, but not limited to this, any flat panel display can be used.
그리고, 위 아래로 적층 상태에 있던 패널하우징이 펼쳐지면 두 개의 디스플레이가 서로 0.1mm 이상에서 5mm 이내로 서로 연결되어 하나의 화면을 형성할 수 있도록 함을 특징으로 하고 있다.And, when the panel housing in the stacked state up and down is unfolded, the two displays are connected to each other within 0.1mm or more and less than 5mm to form a single screen.
이하, 첨부 도면 및 실시예를 참조하여 본 발명의 바람직한 실시형태를 설명한다.EMBODIMENT OF THE INVENTION Hereinafter, preferred embodiment of this invention is described with reference to an accompanying drawing and an Example.
- 실시예 1 - Example 1
도 1은 본 발명의 휴대용 표시장치를 나타낸 도면이다.1 illustrates a portable display device of the present invention.
도 1은 디스플레이(2)(4)가 서로 펼쳐진 상태를 나타낸 도면으로, 상부 패널하우징(20)에는 상부 디스플레이(2)가 구비되고, 하부 패널하우징(40)에는 하부 디스플레이(4)가 구비되며, 상기 상부와 하부 패널하우징(20)(40)은 하우징(50)에 구비된다. FIG. 1 is a view illustrating a state in which the displays 2 and 4 are unfolded. The upper panel housing 20 includes an upper display 2, and the lower panel housing 40 includes a lower display 4. The upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are provided in the housing 50.
도 2는 디스플레이가 상호 겹쳐져 적층된 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.2 is a diagram illustrating a state in which displays overlap each other and are stacked.
도면에서와 같이, 상부 디스플레이(2)가 장착된 상부 패널하우징(20) 아래쪽에는 하부 디스플레이(4)가 장착된 하부 패널하우징(40)이 구비된다. 즉, 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)이 상호 겹쳐져서 적층되어 형성된다. As shown in the figure, a lower panel housing 40 on which the lower display 4 is mounted is provided below the upper panel housing 20 on which the upper display 2 is mounted. That is, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 overlap each other and are formed by being stacked.
그리고, 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)을 고정하는 하우징(50)이 구비된다. 그러므로, 손잡이(45)를 잡고 수평(화살표) 방향으로 하부 패널하우징(40)을 슬라이딩 이동할 수 있다.Then, the housing 50 for fixing the upper and lower panel housing 20, 40 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the handle 45 and to slide the lower panel housing 40 in the horizontal (arrow) direction.
도 3은 디스플레이가 슬라이딩 이동한 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the display is slid.
도면에서와 같이 하부 패널하우징(40)과 하부 디스플레이(4)가 펼쳐져서, 화면이 확장된다. 이때 보호 덮개(43)는 하부 패널하우징(4)과 연결되어 같이 움직인다. As shown in the figure, the lower panel housing 40 and the lower display 4 are unfolded so that the screen is expanded. In this case, the protective cover 43 is connected to the lower panel housing 4 and moves together.
그리고, 하부 패널하우징(40)을 상하(화살표) 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동하여 위로 올리면, 도 1에 나타낸 바와 같이 하부 디스플레이(4)와 상부 디스플레이(2)가 서로 인접하게 되어 하나의 화면을 형성할 수 있는 구조가 된다. 이때 상하부 디스플레이(2)(4)의 높이는 같아진다. Then, when the lower panel housing 40 is moved upward in the vertical direction (arrow), as shown in FIG. 1, the lower display 4 and the upper display 2 are adjacent to each other to form one screen. It becomes the structure that there is. At this time, the heights of the upper and lower displays 2 and 4 are the same.
보호 덮개(43)를 누르면, 하부 패널하우징(40) 안으로 들어가 수납되게 된다. 즉, 상부 디스플레이(20)와 하부 디스플레이(40)가 펼쳐지면, 도 1에 도시된 것처럼 보호 덮개(43)는 수납 가능하다.When the protective cover 43 is pressed, it enters into the lower panel housing 40 to be received. That is, when the upper display 20 and the lower display 40 are unfolded, the protective cover 43 can be stored as shown in FIG. 1.
도 4는 보호덮개를 제거한 패널하우징을 나타낸 도면이다.4 is a view illustrating a panel housing with a protective cover removed.
도면에서처럼, 디스플레이(2)(4) 측면이 패널하우징 측벽(20a)에 가까이 장착된 구조가 된다.  As shown in the figure, the side of the display 2, 4 is mounted close to the panel housing side wall 20a.
도 5는 디스플레이 위 부분에 입력장치가 구비되도록 하는 도면이다. 5 is a diagram illustrating an input device provided on an upper portion of a display.
통상 디스플레이(2)(4) 상단에는 입력장치(250)가 구비되는 경우가 많으며, 따라서 본 발명에서도 디스플레이(2)(4) 상단에 입력장치(250)를 구비하는 실시예를 나타내었다.In general, the input device 250 is often provided at the top of the display 2, 4, and accordingly, the embodiment of the present invention includes the input device 250 at the top of the display 2, 4.
그리고, 디스플레이(2)(4)는 샤시(16)에 장착된 상태로 패널하우징(20)(40)에 장착하게 된다. 따라서,샤시(16) 상단에 입력장치(250)가 구비되게 된다.In addition, the displays 2 and 4 are mounted to the panel housings 20 and 40 while being mounted to the chassis 16. Thus, the input device 250 is provided on the top of the chassis 16.
이를 위해 샤시(16) 측면에 부착부(16c)를 구비하여 입력장치가 부착되도록 한다. 여기서 부착부(16c)는 양면 접착제를 사용할 수도 있고, 접착 본드 등의 접착제를 사용할 수 있음은 당연하다. 또한 양 옆에 고정부(16b)가 구비된다.To this end, the attachment part 16c is provided on the side of the chassis 16 so that the input device is attached. It is obvious that the attachment portion 16c may use a double-sided adhesive, and an adhesive such as an adhesive bond may be used. In addition, fixing parts 16b are provided at both sides.
한편, 입력 장치를 디스플레이와 별도로 구비하지 않고, 디스플레이 각각의 화소내에 센서로 구비될 수 있을 수 있으며, 이 경우에도 본 발명의 실시예가 적용됨은 당연하다. 이때 센서는 광 센서 혹은 저항 센서 등 마이크로 센서 소자로서 다양한 방법이 가능하다.Meanwhile, the input device may not be provided separately from the display, but may be provided as a sensor in each pixel of the display, and in this case, the embodiment of the present invention may be applied. At this time, the sensor is a micro sensor element such as an optical sensor or a resistance sensor, various methods are possible.
도 6은 디스플레이(2)(4) 상단에 입력장치(250)가 장착된 상태의 도면을 나타낸다. FIG. 6 shows a diagram in which the input device 250 is mounted on the top of the display 2 and 4.
도 7은 디스플레이의 이음매부를 확대한 도면으로 도 5의 A 부분을 확대한 도면이다. FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a seam of a display and is an enlarged view of a portion A of FIG. 5.
도면에서처럼 이음매부(8)에 가장 인접한 화소 2n이 있을 때, 상기 인접 화소(2n)와 격벽(2f) 사이의 거리(J)는 1mm 이내로 하며, 가장 근접할 경우에는 0.01mm 이내도 가능하다. 물론 화소 2n의 경계와 격벽(2f)의 경계가 서로 일치 할 수 있음은 물론이다. When there is a pixel 2n closest to the seam 8 as shown in the drawing, the distance J between the adjacent pixel 2n and the partition wall 2f is within 1 mm, and in the closest case, within 0.01 mm. Of course, the boundary of the pixel 2n and the boundary of the partition 2f may coincide with each other.
또한, 격벽(2f)의 두께(K)도 1mm 이내로 하며, 최소 0.05mm 이상으로 한다. 따라서, 이음매부와 가장 인접된 화소(2n)와 디스플레이(2)(4) 가장자리 경계(2g)까지의 거리는 최소 0.06mm 이상에서 2mm 이내로 한다. In addition, the thickness K of the partition 2f is also within 1 mm and at least 0.05 mm. Therefore, the distance between the pixel 2n closest to the seam and the edge boundary 2g of the display 2, 4 is within 2 mm at least 0.06 mm or more.
아울러, 샤시(16)의 두께는 0.1mm이상 1 mm 이내를 넘지 않는 것으로 한다. 하지만 가장 효율적인 샤시(16)의 최대 두께는 0.5mm를 넘지 않게 한다. 따라서 이음매부(8)에서 가장 인접한 화소(2n)와 샤시(16) 경계까지의 거리는 최대 2.5mm이며 최소 0.16 mm 이상이 된다. In addition, the thickness of the chassis 16 shall not exceed 0.1 mm or more and 1 mm or less. However, the maximum thickness of the most efficient chassis 16 does not exceed 0.5 mm. Thus, the distance from the seam 8 to the boundary between the nearest pixel 2n and the chassis 16 is at most 2.5 mm and at least 0.16 mm.
물론, 이음매부(8)의 경계선(2g)과 격벽(2f)의 경계가 완전히 일치할 필요는 없으며, 경계선(2g)에서 0.001mm에서 0.5mm 까지의 범위 안에서 격벽이 구비될 수 있음은 당연하다. 이럴 경우 이음매부(8)에서 가장 인접한 화소(2n)에서 샤시(16) 외곽 경계(16g)까지의 거리는 최대 3.0 mm 혹은 3.5mm 가 된다. Of course, it is not necessary that the boundary between the boundary line 2g and the partition wall 2f of the joint part 8 completely match, and the partition wall may be provided within the range of 0.001mm to 0.5mm at the boundary line 2g. . In this case, the distance from the closest pixel 2n to the outer boundary 16g of the chassis 16 in the seam 8 is at most 3.0 mm or 3.5 mm.
도 8은 입력장치를 확대한 도면으로 도 5의 B 부분을 확대한 도면이다. FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of an input device and is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 5.
통상 입력 장치는 디스플레이 상단에 장착하여 정보를 입력하거나 선택하는 역할을 하게 된다. 따라서 본 발명의 휴대용 표시장치에서도 입력장치(250)를 더 구비할 수도 있게 된다. 그러나, 종래 입력장치를 그대로 사용하면 안되고, 설계 변경하여 만들어진 입력장치(250)를 사용하게 된다. In general, an input device is mounted on an upper portion of a display to serve to input or select information. Accordingly, the portable display device of the present invention may further include an input device 250. However, the conventional input device should not be used as it is, but the input device 250 made by design change is used.
즉, 입력장치에서는 정전용량 값 혹은 저항 값을 읽는 리드선이 입력 장치의 각 변에 구비되게 되는데, 이때, 이음매부에 있는 리드선(250n)의 위치를 설계 변경하여야 한다. 그리고, 격벽(250f)도 존재할 수 있게 된다. 물론 방식에 따라 격벽(250f)이 생략될 수도 있다. That is, in the input device, a lead wire reading a capacitance value or a resistance value is provided on each side of the input device. At this time, the position of the lead wire 250n in the joint portion must be changed. The partition 250f may also exist. Of course, the partition wall 250f may be omitted depending on the scheme.
이음매부(8)에 있는 리드선(250n)과 격벽 사이의 간격(M)은 최소 0.005mm에서 1mm 이내로 하며, 그리고 격벽(250f)의 두께(L)도 0.05mm에서 1mm 이내 혹은 2mm 이내로 한다. The distance M between the lead wire 250n and the partition wall in the joint 8 is at least 0.005 mm to 1 mm, and the thickness L of the partition wall 250 f is also within 0.05 mm to 1 mm or 2 mm.
따라서, 이음매부(8)에서는 리드선(250n)과 입력장치(250) 경계(250g)까지의 거리는 0.0055mm에서 2mm 이내 혹은 3mm 이내가 된다.Therefore, in the seam 8, the distance between the lead wire 250n and the boundary 250g of the input device 250 is within 0.00mm to 2mm or within 3mm.
물론, 이음매부(8)의 경계(250g)와 격벽(250f)의 경계가 완전히 일치할 필요는 없으며, 경계(250g)에서 0.5mm 이내의 범위 안에서 격벽(250f)이 구비될 수 있음은 당연하다. 이럴 경우에는 리드선(250n)과 경계선(250g)까지의 최대값은 2.5 mm 혹은 3.5mm가 된다.Of course, the boundary 250g of the seam 8 and the boundary of the partition 250f do not need to coincide completely, and it is natural that the partition 250f may be provided within a range of 0.5 mm from the boundary 250g. . In this case, the maximum value between the lead wire 250n and the boundary line 250g is 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm.
한편, 정전용량 방식 같이 입력장치 방식에 따라서는 반드시 격벽이 존재할 필요가 있는 것은 아니다. 이런 방식에서도 경계선(250g)과 리드선(250n)사이의 거리는 0.01mm(0.06mm에서 격벽의 최소 두께 0.05mm를 뺀 값임.)에서 2mm 혹은 3mm 이내로 한다. On the other hand, the partition wall does not necessarily need to exist depending on the input device method such as the capacitance method. In this manner, the distance between the boundary line 250g and the lead wire 250n is within 2mm or 3mm from 0.01mm (0.06mm minus the minimum thickness of the bulkhead 0.05mm).
250a는 입력장치의 정보 입력부를 나타내며, 입력장치에서 액티브 에어리어(Active area)라고도 할 수 있다. 그 구조는 저항막 방식과 정전용량 방식에 따라 다르며, 통상의 방법을 사용하지만 입력장치가 평판의 구조를 가지고 입력장치의 표면을 통해서 정보를 입력하는 입력장치라면 그 어떠한 종류라도 본 발명의 설계 구조에 포함됨은 당연하다고 할 것이다. 250a represents an information input unit of the input device and may also be referred to as an active area in the input device. The structure varies depending on the resistive film type and the capacitive type, and although the conventional method is used, any type of input device may be used as long as the input device has a flat plate structure and inputs information through the surface of the input device. Of course it is included.
도 9는 디스플레이의 단면을 나타낸 도면이다.9 is a cross-sectional view of the display.
디스플레이로서 LCD를 사용할 수고 있고, OLED 혹은 전자 종이등도 사용될 수 있으며, 어떠한 디스플레이를 사용하든지, 이음매부(8)에서는 디스플레이 경계(2g)와 가장 이웃하는 화소(2n) 사이의 거리는 매우 중요하며, 본 발명에서 설계한 설계 값은 모든 평판 디스플레이에 그대로 적용될 수 있음은 당연하다.LCD can be used as the display, OLED or electronic paper, etc. can be used, and no matter which display is used, the distance between the display boundary 2g and the neighboring pixel 2n is very important in the seam 8, Naturally, the design values designed in the present invention can be applied to all flat panel displays as they are.
본 발명의 휴대용 표시장치에서는 OLED 방식을 사용하였으며, 그 구조의 단면을 도 9에 도시한 것이다. In the portable display device of the present invention, an OLED method is used, and a cross section of the structure is illustrated in FIG. 9.
디스플레이(2)(4)는 기판(51)에 절연층(53), 전극(54), 코팅 전극(58), 유기 다층막(53) 등을 구비하며, 분리막(57)을 사이에 두고 흡습층(56)도 더 구비할 수 있다.The display 2, 4 includes an insulating layer 53, an electrode 54, a coating electrode 58, an organic multilayer film 53, and the like on a substrate 51, and a moisture absorbing layer with a separator 57 interposed therebetween. 56 may also be further provided.
그런 다음 덮개 기판(52)으로 기판(51)을 덮게 된다. 이때, 격벽(2f)은 접착제 등으로 형성한 실런트 일수도 있지만, 상기 기판이 격벽(2f)의 역할을 할 수 있음은 당연하다.Then, the substrate 51 is covered with the cover substrate 52. In this case, the partition 2f may be a sealant formed of an adhesive or the like, but it is obvious that the substrate may serve as the partition 2f.
즉, 기판 표면을 식각 공정으로 일부 제거하여 기판 표면 안쪽에 공간을 만든 다음, 절연층과 유기 다층막 혹은 전극등을 형성하게 되면, 식각 공정에서 남게 된 기판의 가장자리 부분이 격벽(2f)의 역할을 할 수 있게 됨은 당연하다.That is, when the substrate surface is partially removed by an etching process to make a space inside the substrate surface, and then an insulating layer and an organic multilayer or electrode are formed, the edge portion of the substrate remaining in the etching process serves as the partition wall 2f. It is natural to be able to.
도면에서 보면 이음매부(8)에서는 이웃하는 화소(2n)가 가깝게 형성되어야 하며, 가깝게 형성되는 정도는 도 7의 실시예에서와 같다.As shown in the drawing, the neighboring pixels 2n should be formed closely in the joint portion 8, and the extent to which the neighboring pixels 2n are formed is the same as in the embodiment of FIG. 7.
한편, 샤시(16)가 디스플레이(2)(4)의 상단의 화면 비표시 영역을 일부 덮게 되지만, 이음매부(8)에서는 그 값(도면에서 "P" 값)이 정해져야 한다. On the other hand, although the chassis 16 partially covers the screen non-display area at the top of the display 2, 4, the seam 8 should be determined at its value (" P " value in the figure).
즉, 이음매부(8)에서 화면 비표시 영역을 덮는 부분을 "P"라고 할 때, P의 거리는 도 도7의 실시예에서와 같이 2mm 혹은 3mm 이내로 한다. 물론 최소 값은 0.06mm 이상으로 한다. 그렇게 해서 디스플레이 화소(2n)를 덮지는 말아야 한다. 당연히 이음매 부에서는 샤시(16)가 디스플레이(2)(4) 화소를 덮지 않아야 한다.That is, when a portion of the joint portion 8 covering the screen non-display area is referred to as "P", the distance of P is set to be within 2 mm or 3 mm as in the embodiment of FIG. Of course, the minimum value is 0.06mm or more. In this way, the display pixel 2n should not be covered. Naturally, at the seam, the chassis 16 should not cover the pixels of the display 2, 4.
도 10은 입력장치가 장착된 디스플레이가 패널하우징에 장착되는 도면이다. 10 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
입력장치(250)가 구비되 디스플레이(2)(4)의 이음매부(8)는 패널하우징의 한 측벽(20a) 상단에 장착되게 된다.  An input device 250 is provided so that the seam 8 of the display 2 or 4 is mounted on the top of one side wall 20a of the panel housing.
그리고 외부에는 "" 자 형상의 덮개(24)가 패널하우징(20) 상단에 구비되어, 디스플레이(2)(4)의 화면비표시 영역인 가장자리를 덮개 된다.In addition, a "" shaped cover 24 is provided at the top of the panel housing 20 to cover the edge of the non-display area of the display 2 or 4.
도 11은 디스플레이와 입력장치가 각각 별개로 패널하우징에 장착되는 도면이다.11 is a view in which the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
도면에서처럼 디스플레이(2)와 입력장치(250)가 각각 분리되어 패널하우징(20)에 장착되고, 도 10에 구비된 덮개(24)는 구비되지 않는다.As shown in the drawing, the display 2 and the input device 250 are separated from each other and mounted on the panel housing 20, and the cover 24 provided in FIG. 10 is not provided.
따라서, 입력장치(250)가 휴대용 표시장치에서 디스플레이(2) 표면을 보호하는 외부 보호판 역할도 하게 된다.Accordingly, the input device 250 also serves as an external protective plate that protects the surface of the display 2 in the portable display device.
이때, 입력장치(250)에 "" 자 모양의 마스크 프린팅(Mask Printing)(16d)을 하게 된다. 그리고 상기 마스크 프린팅(16d)은 디스플레이(2)(4) 가장자리 화면비표시 영역을 막아주게 된다. 이때 막아주는 효과는 시각적인 의미가 더 크다. At this time, the ““ ”shaped mask printing 16d is applied to the input device 250. The mask printing 16d blocks the non-display area of the edges of the display 2 and 4. The blocking effect is more visual.
물론 원안에서 나타낸 것처럼, 또 마스크 프린팅(16d)의 또 다른 실시예를 볼 수 있는데, 이 경우에 마스크 프린팅(16d)은 "" 자 모양이지만 이음매 부분이 얇게 형성되었으며, 이때, 이음매 부분이 얇게 형성된 이유는 도9의 "P" 값이 정해지는 원리와 같다. Of course, as shown in the original, another embodiment of the mask printing 16d can also be seen, in which case the mask printing 16d is "" shaped but the seam is thinly formed, wherein the seam is thinly formed. The reason is the same as that in which the "P" value in Fig. 9 is determined.
도 12는 입력장치가 구비된 디스플레이가 패널하우징에 장착된 경우의 단면도이다.12 is a cross-sectional view when a display equipped with an input device is mounted in a panel housing.
패널하우징(20) 내부에 밧테리 혹은 회로 본체(29)가 구비되고 받침부(26a)가 더 구비되게 된다. 그리고 상기 받침부(26a)가 디스플레이(2)(4)를 지지하게 된다.The battery or circuit main body 29 is provided inside the panel housing 20, and the supporting part 26a is further provided. The support 26a supports the display 2 and 4.
그리고 이음매부(8)의 패널하우징 측벽(20a)은 도면에서처럼, 단차가 형성되어 상기 단차(20c)에 디스플레이(2)(4)가 장착되도록 하는 것이다. 그리고 돌출부(20d)가 형성되어 입력장치(250)를 지지하게 된다.In addition, the panel housing side wall 20a of the joint portion 8 is formed with a step so that the display 2 and 4 can be mounted on the step 20c. A protrusion 20d is formed to support the input device 250.
통상 디스플레이(2)(4) 상단에 입력장치(250)가 구비될 때, 디스플레이와 입력장치(250)사이에 일정한 간격이 존재하게 되며, 이러한 간격을 보완하기 위해 돌출부(20d)를 형성하게 된다. 그러므로 돌출부(20d)의 두께(Y)는 디스플레이와 입력장치 사이의 간격과 같게 된다. 아울러, 돌출부(20d)가 돌출되는 길이(W)는 디스플레이(2)의 화면비표시 영역과 샤시(16)의 두께를 고려해 2.5mm 혹은 3.5 mm 를 넘지 말아야 한다. 그리고, 입력장치(250)가 지지됨을 고려하여 돌출부(20d)의 길이(W)는 최소 0.1mm 이상은 되어야 한다. In general, when the input device 250 is provided on the top of the display 2, 4, a predetermined gap exists between the display and the input device 250, and a protrusion 20d is formed to compensate for the gap. . Therefore, the thickness Y of the protrusion 20d is equal to the distance between the display and the input device. In addition, the length W from which the protrusion 20d protrudes should not exceed 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm in consideration of the non-display area of the display 2 and the thickness of the chassis 16. In addition, considering that the input device 250 is supported, the length W of the protrusion 20d should be at least 0.1 mm.
도 13은 디스플레이와 입력장치가 패널하우징에 분리되어 각각 장착되는 경우의 단면도이다.13 is a cross-sectional view when the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing.
도면에서처럼, 상부 커버(24)가 생략된 구조이며, 따라서 입력장치(250)가 상부 커버의 기능을 하는 구조가 된다. As shown in the figure, the upper cover 24 is omitted, and thus the input device 250 has a function of functioning as the upper cover.
이경우에는 디스플레이(2)를 지지하는 제 1 받침부(26a)와 입력장치(250)를 지지하는 제 2 받침부(26b)를 각각 구비한다. 그러나, 디스플레이(2)와 입력장치가 이음매부(8)에 장착되는 구조는 도 12와 유사한 개념을 가진다. In this case, each of the first supporting part 26a supporting the display 2 and the second supporting part 26b supporting the input device 250 are provided. However, the structure in which the display 2 and the input device are mounted on the joint 8 has a concept similar to that of FIG.
따라서, 측벽(20a)의 단차(20c)가 디스플레이(2)를 지지하고, 측벽(20a)의 돌출부(20d)가 입력장치(250)를 지지하게 된다. 이때에도 돌출부(20d)의 길이(W)도 디스플레이의 화면 비표시 영역을 벗어나서는 안되며 0.1mm 이상 2.5mm이하 혹은 3.5mm이하로 한다.Therefore, the step 20c of the side wall 20a supports the display 2, and the protrusion 20d of the side wall 20a supports the input device 250. In this case, the length W of the protrusion 20d should not be beyond the screen non-display area of the display and should be 0.1 mm or more and 2.5 mm or less or 3.5 mm or less.
도 14는 입력장치가 구비된 디스플레이가 패널하우징 측벽에 장착되는 도면이다.14 is a diagram in which a display equipped with an input device is mounted on a panel housing sidewall.
도 15는 디스플레이와 입력장치가 패널하우징에 별개로 분리되어 각각 장착됨을 나타내는 도면이다. 15 is a view showing that the display and the input device are separately mounted to the panel housing separately.
이때, 보호필름(20b)이 더 구비되어 디스플레이(2) 측면과 입력장치(250) 측면을 보호하게 된다. 이 경우 보호필름(20b)은 물리적 충격에서 보호하는 기능 보다는 밀봉효과의 기능이 더 높다. 따라서 두께는 두꺼울 필요는 없고, 0.01mm이상에서 0.5mm 이내로 한다. 물론, 보호필름 만으로 외부 충격에서 보호하게 될 경우에는 보호필름(20a)의 두께를 최대 1mm까지 할 수 있다.At this time, the protective film 20b is further provided to protect the side of the display 2 and the input device 250. In this case, the protective film 20b has a higher function of sealing effect than a function of protecting from physical shock. Therefore, the thickness does not need to be thick, but it is within 0.5mm from 0.01mm or more. Of course, when the protective film only to protect from external impact, the thickness of the protective film (20a) can be up to 1mm.
그리고, 디스플레이(2)(4)가 패널하우징(20)(40) 측벽 상단에 구비될 때, 보호 필름(20b)이 생략되는 구조가 만들어 질 수 있다. 이때에는 샤시(16)의 두께를 두껍게 하여 보호필름의 역할도 하게 할 수 있다. 그리고. 그림에서 경계인 "B"부분에 접착제가 코팅되어 밀봉 효과(보호필름을 사용하지 않게 되어서 접착제로 밀봉효과를 대신 갖게 할 수도 있음.)를 가져오게 할 수 있다. And, when the display (2) 4 is provided on the top of the side wall of the panel housing 20, 40, a structure in which the protective film 20b is omitted can be made. At this time, the thickness of the chassis 16 can be thickened to serve as a protective film. And. In the figure, the "B" part of the boundary is coated with an adhesive, which can lead to a sealing effect (no protective film can be used to give the adhesive a sealing effect instead).
한편, 도 15의 경우 디스플레이(2)와 입력장치(250) 사이의 간격이 더 커지게 되므로, 중간 받침부(30)를 구비하여 입력장치(250)를 지지하게 된다. Meanwhile, in the case of FIG. 15, since the distance between the display 2 and the input device 250 becomes larger, the intermediate support part 30 is provided to support the input device 250.
그리고, 상기 중간 받침부(30)는 디스플레이(2) 이음매부(8)의 화면 비표시 영역내에 존재하게 된다. 따라서, 상기 중간 받침부(30)는 도 8의 설명에서와 같이 최소 0.16mm에서 최대 2.5mm 혹은 3.5mm 의 폭을 가지게 된다. In addition, the intermediate support part 30 is present in the non-display area of the display 2 joint part 8. Therefore, the intermediate support portion 30 has a width of at least 0.16mm to at most 2.5mm or 3.5mm, as described in FIG. 8.
도 16은 입력장치(250)가 구비된 디스플레이(2)가 패널하우징(20)에 장착됨을 나타내고, 도 17과 도 18은 디스플레이(2)와 입력장치(250)가 패널하우징(20)에 별개로 분리되어 각각 장착됨을 나타내는 도면이다.FIG. 16 shows that the display 2 with the input device 250 is mounted to the panel housing 20, and FIGS. 17 and 18 show that the display 2 and the input device 250 are separate from the panel housing 20. It is divided into and it is a figure which shows that each is mounted.
패널하우징(20)에서 디스플레이가 인접되는 측벽(20a)에 제 3 받침부(26c)를 구비하여, 상기 제 3 받침부(26c)가 디스플레이(2)를 지지하도록 하고, 상기 디스플레이(2)는 입력장치(250)를 지지하게 된다.In the panel housing 20, the third support part 26c is provided on the side wall 20a adjacent to the display so that the third support part 26c supports the display 2, and the display 2 is The input device 250 is supported.
그러나 17의 경우처럼 입력장치(250)와 디스플레이(2)가 분리되어 각각 패널하우징(20)에 장착될 경우에는, 패널하우징(20) 측벽(20a)에 제 4 받침부(26d)를 더 구비하여 입력장치(250)를 지지하게 한다.However, when the input device 250 and the display 2 are separated and mounted on the panel housing 20 as in the case of 17, the fourth support part 26d is further provided on the side wall 20a of the panel housing 20. To support the input device 250.
당연히, 상기 제 4 받침부(26d)의 폭도 최소 0.16mm에서 최대 2.5mm 혹은 3.5mm의 값을 가지게 된다. 즉, 상기 제 4 받침부(26d)는 디스플레이(2)의 이음매부에서 화면 비표시 영역내에 존재하게 되는 것이다. Naturally, the width of the fourth support part 26d also has a value of at least 0.16 mm to at most 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm. That is, the fourth support part 26d is present in the screen non-display area at the joint part of the display 2.
이때, 상기 화면 비표시 영역은 하나의 디스플레이(샤시에 장착된)에서의 비표시 영역이므로 두 개의 디스플레이가 상호 인접하게 되었을 때에의 화면 비표시 영역은 5mm 혹은 6mm 이내가 되는 것이다.In this case, since the screen non-display area is a non-display area in one display (mounted in the chassis), the screen non-display area when the two displays are adjacent to each other is within 5 mm or 6 mm.
그리고, 도 16에서처럼 디스플레이(2)가 패널하우징(20)의 이음매부 측벽에 밀착되었을 때에, 신뢰성이 고려된다면 패널하우징(20) 이음매부 측벽의 두께가 최대 1.5mm이고 샤시(16)의 두께가 1mm 정도가 될 수 있다. 그러므로, 디스플레이(2) 이음매부 측면을 감싸는 샤시(16) 두께와 패널하우징(20)의 이음매부 측벽의 두께를 모두 합하면 2.5mm 가 된다. When the display 2 is in close contact with the joint side wall of the panel housing 20 as shown in FIG. 16, if the reliability is considered, the thickness of the side wall of the panel housing 20 joint is 1.5 mm at maximum and the thickness of the chassis 16 is increased. It can be about 1mm. Therefore, the sum of the thickness of the chassis 16 that surrounds the display 2 seam side and the thickness of the side wall of the seam side of the panel housing 20 is 2.5 mm.
따라서, 패널하우징(20)(40) 두 개가 상호 밀착되었을 때에 두 개의 디스플레이(2)(4) 사이의 상호간에 거리는 상기 2.5mm 값의 두배인 5mm가 되는 것이다. Therefore, when two panel housings 20 and 40 are in close contact with each other, the distance between the two displays 2 and 4 becomes 5 mm, which is twice the value of 2.5 mm.
한편, 도 18의 도면에서 처럼, 패널하우징의 측벽(20a)(40a)의 두께가 각각 0.5mm 이면(두 측벽이 합치면 1 mm), 샤시(16)의 두께가 또한 각각 0.5 mm 라고 해도 두개의 디스플레이(2)(4) 사이의 거리가 5mm 가 되지 않게 된다. 즉, 이런 경우에는 디스플레이 사이의 거리가 2mm 가 된다. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 18, if the thickness of the side walls 20a and 40a of the panel housing is 0.5 mm each (1 mm if the two side walls are combined), the thickness of the chassis 16 is also 0.5 mm, respectively. The distance between the displays 2 and 4 does not become 5 mm. In this case, the distance between the displays is 2 mm.
하지만 도 18의 실시예에서처럼 패널하우징 측벽(20a)(40a)과 디스플레이(2)(4)(샤시에 장착된 형태의 디스플레이)가 다소 떨어지게 위치하여 디스플레이(2)(4) 사이의 거리가 5mm 가 될 수 있음은 물론이다. 마찬가지로 패널하우징 측벽(20a)(40a)이 더 얇고, 샤시(16)가 더 얇아도 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 5mm가 될수 있는 것이다.However, as in the embodiment of FIG. 18, the panel housing sidewalls 20a and 40a and the display 2 and 4 (the display mounted on the chassis) are located slightly apart so that the distance between the displays 2 and 4 is 5 mm. Of course it can be. Similarly, even if the panel housing sidewalls 20a and 40a are thinner and the chassis 16 is thinner, the distance between the displays can be 5 mm.
입력장치 사이의 거리도 디스플레이 사이의 거리에 준하여 정해질 수도 있다, 즉 디스플레이 사이의 거리와 입력장치 사이의 거리가 같을 수가 있다는 것이다.The distance between the input devices may also be determined based on the distance between the displays, that is, the distance between the display and the input device may be the same.
아울러, 본 발명에서 샤시는 알루미늄 형태로 되어 디스플레이를 감싸는 부품이지만, 경우에 따라서는 플라스틱 기구물 형태일 수도 있음은 당연하다. 또한 샤시와 기구물이 함께 같이 사용될 수도 있으며, 이 모든 경우에도 이음매 부분의 상단을 덮은 원리는 본 발명에 준하게 된다. In addition, in the present invention, the chassis is a part that surrounds the display in the form of aluminum, but in some cases it may be in the form of plastic appliances. In addition, the chassis and the apparatus may be used together, and in all of these cases, the principle of covering the upper end of the joint part is in accordance with the present invention.
도 19는 디스플레이와 입력장치 사이의 지지수단을 나타낸 도면이다.19 shows the support means between the display and the input device.
디스플레이(2)(4)와 입력장치(250)는 일정한 간격으로 떨어져 있으며, 그 거리는 0.5mm에서 5mm 정도로 단말기 특성에 따라 다양할 수 있다. 따라서, 입력장치를 별도로 지지할 필요가 있으며, 이러한 지지수단을 도 19에 나타내었다.The display 2 and 4 and the input device 250 are spaced apart at regular intervals, and the distance thereof may vary from 0.5 mm to 5 mm depending on the characteristics of the terminal. Therefore, it is necessary to separately support the input device, and this supporting means is shown in FIG.
중간 받침부(30)와 제 4 받침부(26d)의 형상은 같으나, 중간 받침부는 디스플레이(2)의 상단에서 입력장치(250)를 지지하는 역할을 하는 것이며, 제 4 받침부(26d)는 패널하우징(20)의 측벽(20a)에 형성되어 입력장치(250)를 지지하는 역할을 하게 되는 것이다.Although the intermediate supporting part 30 and the fourth supporting part 26d have the same shape, the intermediate supporting part serves to support the input device 250 at the top of the display 2, and the fourth supporting part 26d is It is formed on the side wall 20a of the panel housing 20 to support the input device 250.
그리고, 도 7에서 18까지의 도면과 설명에서는 편의상 한개의 디스플레이(2)(4)와 패널하우징(20)(40)을 도시하고 설명하였지만, 이음매(8) 즉 경계부분을 중심으로 좌우 대칭되는 위치에 또 다른 디스플레이와 패널하우징이 같은 원리로 구비될 수 있음은 당연하다. 7 to 18 illustrate and illustrate one display 2, 4, and panel housing 20, 40 for convenience, the left and right symmetry around the seam 8, that is, the boundary portion. It goes without saying that another display and panel housing in place can be provided on the same principle.
도 19는 중간 받침부(30)의 형상을 나타낸 도면이지만, 제 4 받침부(26d)의 형상도 비슷하다고 할 수 있다. 19 is a view showing the shape of the intermediate supporting part 30, but it can be said that the shape of the fourth supporting part 26d is similar.
그리고 가운데 부분의 폭 "W"는 본 발명에서 화면 비표시 영역으로 2.5mm 혹은 3.5mm이내가 된다.The width "W" of the center portion is 2.5 mm or 3.5 mm or less in the non-display area of the present invention.
도 20, 도 21 및 도 22는 디스플레이와 입력장치의 또 다른 중간판 형태의 지지수단을 나타낸 도면이다.20, 21 and 22 are views showing the supporting means in the form of another intermediate plate of the display and the input device.
상기 지지수단은, 투명한 프라스틱 판을 사용하게 된다. 투명한 프라스틱으로 예를 들면 PC(Poly Carbonate), PET(Polyethylene terephthalate)등이 있게 된다. The support means uses a transparent plastic plate. Transparent plastics include, for example, polycarbonate (PC) and polyethylene terephthalate (PET).
즉, 디스플레이(2)(혹은 샤시(16))에서 입력장치(250)까지의 거리 만큼의 두께를 가진 투명 플라스틱 판을 사용하여 중간 지지판을 만들 수도 있고, 도 19에서처럼 물결 무늬의 형상을 가진 중간판(30a)을 디스플레이(2)와 샤시 사에에 장착하여 지지 역할을 하게 할 수 있다.That is, the intermediate support plate may be made of a transparent plastic plate having a thickness of the distance from the display 2 (or the chassis 16) to the input device 250, or as shown in FIG. The plate 30a may be mounted to the display 2 and the chassis to serve as a supporting role.
도 20에서 "I"는 물결 무늬의 한 개의 폭을 말하며, 높이 "H"의 0.2 배에서 10 배 정도의 크기를 가질 수 있다. 그리고, 높이 "H"는 디스플레이(2)(4)와 입력장치(250) 사이의 간격에 해당되는 높이이다. In FIG. 20, "I" refers to one width of a wave pattern, and may have a size of about 0.2 to about 10 times the height "H". And, the height "H" is the height corresponding to the gap between the display (2) 4 and the input device 250.
그리고, 이음매부(8) 부분은 일정한 두께를 가지고 다른 부분은 얇게 만들어진 도 21 형태의 중간판(30b)을 구비할 수도 있다. 이때 높이 "H"는 디스플레이(2)(4)와 입력장치(250) 사이의 간격에 해당되고, 일정한 폭 "Z"는 이음매 부분에서 입력장치를 효과적으로 지지할 수 있을 정도의 폭을 말한다. 통상 "H"의 0.2배에서 20 배 이내로 "Z"의 값이 정해진다. In addition, the joint portion 8 may be provided with an intermediate plate 30b of the form of FIG. 21 made of a constant thickness and the other portion thinned. At this time, the height "H" corresponds to the distance between the display (2) 4 and the input device 250, the constant width "Z" refers to the width enough to effectively support the input device in the joint portion. Usually, the value of "Z" is determined within 0.2 to 20 times of "H".
또한 도 22에서처럼 이음매부(8) 부분만 지지하는 중간판(16c)를 구비할 수 있으며, "H"와 "Z"의 크기는 각각 20의 경우와 같다고 할 수 있다. In addition, as shown in Figure 22 may be provided with an intermediate plate (16c) supporting only the joint portion 8, the size of "H" and "Z" can be said to be the same as the case of 20, respectively.
도 23은 커넥터가 부착된 디스플레이를 나타낸 도면이다.23 shows a display with a connector attached.
통상의 디스플레이와 입력장치는 단말기 본체부와 연결하기 위한 커넥터를 구비하게 되는데, 본 발명에서는 커넥터 위치를 설계 변경하게 된다. Conventional displays and input devices are provided with a connector for connecting with the terminal body, in the present invention is to change the design of the connector.
도면에서처럼, 이음매부(8)를 중심으로 상호 대칭 구조를 가지도록 디스플레이(2)(4)와 입력장치(250)가 구비되게 된다. 여기에, 상기 디스플레이 장치와 입력장치를 커넥터(2d)(250d)와 연결하는 FPC(Flexable Printed Circuit)(2c)(4c)(250c)가 구비되며, 이때 상기 커넥터(2d)(250d)와 FPC(2c)(4c)(250c)는 이음매부 반대쪽에 장착하게 된다. As shown in the figure, the display 2, 4 and the input device 250 is provided to have a symmetrical structure with respect to the joint portion (8). Here, a flexible printed circuit (FPC) 2c, 4c, 250c connecting the display device and the input device with the connectors 2d and 250d is provided, wherein the connectors 2d and 250d and the FPC are provided. (2c) (4c) 250c are mounted on opposite sides of the joint.
이때, 입력장치(250)의 커넥터(250d)는 디스플레이(2)(4)의 접합부(2e)(4e)와 납 땜등을 통해 회로적으로 연결되도록 할 수 있다. 그렇게 되면, 디스플레이(2)(4)의 커넥터(2d)(4d)와 본체부와의 연결로 입력장치(250)와 본체부 연결도 해결되는 것이다. 즉, 디스플레이 커넥터(2d)(4d)가 입력장치 커넥터의 기능을 포함할 수 있다. In this case, the connector 250d of the input device 250 may be connected to the junction portions 2e and 4e of the display 2 and 4 through a solder or the like. In this case, the connection between the input device 250 and the main body is also solved by the connection between the connectors 2d and 4d of the display 2 and 4 and the main body. In other words, the display connectors 2d and 4d may include the function of the input device connector.
그리고, 디스플레이와 입력장치의 한 변에 외부 신호선(FPC)를 연결하게 되는데, 도 12 에서 도 18까지의 각각의 도면에 표기된 이음매부의 반대쪽의 한변에 외부 신호선을 연결하게 된다.Then, the external signal line FPC is connected to one side of the display and the input device, and the external signal line is connected to one side of the opposite side of the joint shown in each of FIGS. 12 to 18.
물론, 디스플레이(2)(4)와 입력장치(250)가 분리되어 각각 별개로 패널하우징(20)(40)에 장착될 경우(도 13, 15, 17의 실시예)에는 입력장치(250)에 외부 신호선(FPC)를 연결할 때, 이음매부(8)를 제외한 다른 세 변중에서 한 변을 택하여 연결할 수 있다. Of course, when the display 2, 4 and the input device 250 is separated and mounted on the panel housing 20 and 40 separately (the embodiments of FIGS. 13, 15, and 17), the input device 250 When connecting the external signal line (FPC) to the, it is possible to select one side of the other three sides except the joint (8).
도 24내지 도 26은 또 다른 실시예의 디스플레이 패널의 형상을 나타낸 도면이다.24 to 26 are views illustrating the shape of a display panel according to still another embodiment.
도 24는 제 1 변이 이음매부일 때 구동 드라이버(2k)(구동 IC 반도체 칩)가 위치하는 부분이 제 4변이 된다. 즉 이음매부를 오른쪽(경우에 따라 왼쪽)으로 할 때, 구동 드라이버(2k)가 위치하는 부분이 위쪽 혹은 아래쪽이 되게 된다.In FIG. 24, the part where the drive driver 2k (drive IC semiconductor chip) is located turns into a 4th side when a 1st side is a joint part. In other words, when the joint is made to the right side (in some cases, the left side), the portion where the drive driver 2k is located becomes the upper side or the lower side.
제 4변에 구동 드라이버(2k)를 실장하기 위해 제 1변 혹은 제 3변의 패널 전극(2f)과 연결된 공급선(2i)을 제 4변까지 연결되도록 하는 것이다. 즉, 공급선(2i)을 1변과 3변으로 나누어 제 4변에 도달되도록 하는 것이다. 이때, 공급선(2i)은 구동 드라이버(2k)와 연결되어 신호선을 공급하기 위한 전기 배선이다. 그리고 본 발명에서 전극(2f)이라고 간단히 표현했지만, 실제는 TFT(Thin Film Transister)에 구동 신호를 보내는 화소 전극을 의미할 수도 있다.In order to mount the drive driver 2k on the fourth side, the supply line 2i connected to the panel electrode 2f on the first side or the third side is connected to the fourth side. That is, the supply line 2i is divided into one side and three sides to reach the fourth side. At this time, the supply line 2i is an electrical wire for connecting to the driving driver 2k to supply a signal line. In the present invention, the electrode 2f is simply expressed, but may actually mean a pixel electrode that transmits a driving signal to a TFT (Thin Film Transister).
따라서, 이 경우에는 도 7에서 도시된 "J"갑과 "k" 값의 합인 2mm 의 값에 1.5mm의 여유를 더 주게 된다. 즉, 상기 1,5mm 이내에 공급선(2i)이 지나가기 위한 거리를 확보하기 위함이다. 따라서 디스플레이 이음매부(8)부에서 가장 가까운 화소에서부터 디스플레이(2)(4) 경계선까지의 거리는 최대 3.5mm를 넘지 않는 것이 좋다. Therefore, in this case, a margin of 1.5 mm is further added to the value of 2 mm, which is the sum of the value of "J" and "k" shown in FIG. That is, to secure a distance for the supply line 2i to pass within the 1,5mm. Therefore, the distance from the pixel closest to the display seam 8 to the boundary of the display 2 and 4 is preferably no more than 3.5 mm.
도 25는 연결 공급선을 변경한 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다,25 is a view of another embodiment in which the connection supply line is changed;
제 1변을 이음매부라고 할 때, 이음매부분을 최소화하기 위해서 제 1변에서는 공급선(2i)이 지나가지 않게 된다. 그리고, 이음매부(8)와 반대 편인 제 3변에 공급선(2i)이 모두 지나가도록 하며, 상기 공급선(2i)이 구동 드라이버(2k)와 만나게 되는 것이다. 이렇게 되면 제 1변에서, 이음매부(8)부에서 가장 가까운 화소에서부터 디스플레이(2)(4) 경계선까지의 거리는 최대 2.0mm로 할 수 있는 것이다. When the first side is called a joint, the supply line 2i does not pass in the first side in order to minimize the joint. Then, all the supply lines 2i pass through the third side opposite to the seam 8, and the supply lines 2i meet the driving driver 2k. In this case, in the first side, the distance from the pixel closest to the joint portion 8 to the boundary line of the display 2 and 4 can be 2.0 mm at the maximum.
물론 설계 조건에 따라, 공급선(2i)이 3변에 많이 지나가게 하고, 제 1변에는 적게 지나가게 할 수 있다. 즉, 공급선(2i)이 지나가는 비율을 제 3변과 제 1변에 각각 일정 비율로 분배할 수 있다.Of course, depending on the design conditions, it is possible to make the supply line 2i pass a lot on three sides and to pass a little on the first side. That is, the rate at which the supply line 2i passes can be distributed to the third side and the first side at a constant ratio, respectively.
도 26은 두 개의 디스플레이를 배치한 경우의 도면이다.FIG. 26 is a diagram in which two displays are arranged. FIG.
도면은 디스플레이(2)(4) 바로 상단에 입력장치(200)(400)가 장착된 인셀(On-cell) 방식을 나타낸 것으로, 이음매부(8)가 오른쪽(경우에 따라 왼쪽)이라면 구동 드라이버와 연결되는 FPC(2c)(4c)나 외부 연결 커넥터(2d)(4d)가 아래쪽(경우에 따라 위쪽일 수도 있음)에 위치하게 되는 것이다.The drawing illustrates an in-cell method in which the input devices 200 and 400 are mounted directly on the upper side of the display 2 and 4, and the driving driver is provided when the joint 8 is right (or in some cases left). FPC (2c) (4c) or the external connection connector (2d) (4d) to be connected to the lower side (may be the upper side in some cases).
마찬가지로 입력장치 연결용 FPC(250c)와 커넥터(250d)도 아래쪽에 위치하게 되는 것이다. Similarly, the FPC 250c and the connector 250d for connecting the input device are also positioned below.
물론, 디스플레이(2)(4)와 입력장치(200)(400)가 일정 간격으로 떨어진 상태에서 장착하게 되면, 입력장치 커넥터는 이음매 부분을 제외한 세 변에 장착할 수가 있는 것이다.Of course, if the display (2) 4 and the input device 200, 400 is mounted at a predetermined interval apart, the input device connector can be mounted on three sides except for the joint portion.
도 27에서 도 30까지는 본 발명의 블록도를 나타낸 도면이다.27 to 30 are block diagrams illustrating the present invention.
본 발명은 두 개의 디스플레이(2)(4)가 구비되고 입력장치(250-1)(250-2)도 2 개가 구비되어, 상기 디스플레이 상단에 입력장치가 구비된다.In the present invention, two displays 2 and 4 are provided, and two input devices 250-1 and 250-2 are also provided, and an input device is provided on the top of the display.
따라서, 본 발명은 두 개의 디스플레이(2)(4)를 제어하기 위한 제어부가 구비되고, 두 개의 입력장치(250-1)(250-2)를 통해 출력되는 신호도 제어하게 된다.Therefore, the present invention is provided with a control unit for controlling the two display (2) (4), and also controls the signals output through the two input devices (250-1) (250-2).
도 27에서처럼, 본체제어부(105)내에는 제어부(110), 메모리(Memory)(120)와 타임 컨트롤러(Time Controller)(125), 디스플레이 구동부(130)및 입력장치 구동부(140) 등이 구비된다.As shown in FIG. 27, the controller 110, a memory 120, a time controller 125, a display driver 130, an input device driver 140, and the like are provided in the main body controller 105. .
즉, 제어부(110), 메모리(120), 타임 컨트롤러(125), 디스플레이 구동부(130) 및 입력장치 구동부(140)의 기능을 하는 각각의 소자가 본체 제어부(105) 내에 모두 구비되는 형태처럼 하나의 부품으로 제조되고 구비될 수 있다. That is, each element that functions as the controller 110, the memory 120, the time controller 125, the display driver 130, and the input device driver 140 may be provided in the main body controller 105. It can be manufactured and provided as a part of.
그리고, 디스플레이 구동부(130)에서는 화면을 분할하여 제1 디스플레이(2)와 제 2디스플레이(4)에 각각 데이터를 보내게 된다. 또한, 입력장치 구동부(140)도 제1 입력장치(250-1)와 제 2 입력장치(250-2)에서 출력하는 신호를 각각 교정하고 조정한다. The display driver 130 divides the screen and sends data to the first display 2 and the second display 4, respectively. In addition, the input device driver 140 also corrects and adjusts signals output from the first input device 250-1 and the second input device 250-2, respectively.
아울러, 디스플레이(2)(4)의 화면을 표시하기 위해서는, 데이터 신호를 제공하는 소스(Source)(2b)(4b)부와 라인 선택 신호를 제공하는 게이트(Gate)부(2c)(4c)가 존재하게 된다.In addition, in order to display the screen of the display (2) (4), the source (2b) (4b) section for providing a data signal and the gate section (2c) (4c) for providing a line selection signal Will be present.
또한, 센서(Sensor)(135)는 패널하우징(2)(40)의 결합상태를 갑지하는 센서이다. 즉. 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 적층상태로 결합되어 있는가를 감지하게 된다.In addition, the sensor 135 is a sensor that promotes the coupling state of the panel housing 2 and 40. In other words. It is detected whether the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are coupled in a stacked state.
도 28와 도 29에서는 디스플레이 구동부(130)를 나타내었으며, 상기 구동부(130)는 컬럼(Column) 데이터 처리부(131)와 로우(Row) 데이터 처리부(132)로 구성된다.28 and 29 illustrate the display driver 130, and the driver 130 includes a column data processor 131 and a row data processor 132.
이때, 하나의 디스플레이 화면을 두 개로 분할하는 방법은 소스 데이터를 분할하는 방법과 게이트 신호를 분할하는 방법이 있다.At this time, a method of dividing a display screen into two may be divided into source data and a gate signal.
도 28서처럼, 소스 데이터(화면의 데이터 신호)를 공급하는 컬럼 데이터 처리부(131)에서는 제1 디스플레이(2)와 제 2 디스플레이(4)에 동일한 데이터 신호를 공급하고, 로 데이터 처리부(Gate 신호)(132)에서는 신호를 분할하여 제 1 디스플레이(2)와 제2 디스플레이(4)에 나누어서 공급하게 된다. As shown in FIG. 28, the column data processing unit 131 for supplying source data (data signal on the screen) supplies the same data signal to the first display 2 and the second display 4, and the raw data processing unit (Gate signal). In 132, the signal is divided and supplied to the first display 2 and the second display 4.
이때 분할되는 정도는 통상 1:1(전체 화면이 240 라인이면 제1 제2 디스플레이가 각각 120 라인씩)이 되지만, 단말기 설계에 따라 그 비율이 조절될 수 있음은 당연하다. 예를 들어 제 1 디스플레이를 140 Line 제 2 디스플레이를 100 Line 등으로 다양한 비율 조정은 가능하다. In this case, the degree of division is usually 1: 1 (120 lines each for the first second display if the entire screen is 240 lines), but the ratio may be adjusted according to the terminal design. For example, various ratios can be adjusted to the 140 lines of the first display and the 100 lines of the second display.
도 29의 블록도의 경우는, 로 데이터 처리부(Gate 신호)(132)는 제1 디스플레이(2)와 제 2 디스플레이(4)에 동일한 데이터 신호를 공급하고, 소스 데이터(화면의 데이터 신호)를 공급하는 컬럼 데이터 처리부(131)에서는 제1 디스플레이(2)와 제 2 디스플레이(4)에 각각 신호를 분할하여 보내게 된다. In the block diagram of FIG. 29, the raw data processing unit (Gate signal) 132 supplies the same data signal to the first display 2 and the second display 4, and supplies the source data (data signal on the screen). The supplied column data processing unit 131 divides and sends a signal to the first display 2 and the second display 4, respectively.
도 30은 입력장치 구동부(140)를 상세히 나타낸 도면이다. 30 is a detailed view of the input device driver 140.
우선 교정기능 수행부(141)는 시스템이 최초 동작할 때 입력장치(250))에 대한 교정(calibration) 기능을 수행한다. 교정 기능 수행부(141)에서 수행되는 교정 기능에 따라 입력장치(250)에 대한 정확한 좌표 값에 대응되는 패널(입력장치에서 정보가 직접 입력되는 부분) 신호가 선정된다. First, the calibration function performing unit 141 performs a calibration function on the input device 250 when the system is initially operated. According to a calibration function performed by the calibration function performing unit 141, a signal of a panel (a portion where information is directly input from the input device) corresponding to the correct coordinate value of the input device 250 is selected.
즉, 디스플레이(2)(4) 해상도(Source와 Gate의 각각의 라인수)에 따라 좌표 값에 대응되는 입력장치(250) 신호가 선정되고, 상기 선정된 신호는 제어부(110)로 제공된다. 이에 따라 상기 제어부(110)는 상기 패널 신호에 대응되는 상기 좌표 값을 저장하고 관리한다.That is, the input device 250 signal corresponding to the coordinate value is selected according to the resolution of the display 2 and 4 (the number of lines of the source and the gate), and the selected signal is provided to the controller 110. Accordingly, the controller 110 stores and manages the coordinate values corresponding to the panel signal.
그리고, 평균값 검출 횟수 조정부(143)는 제어부(110)로부터 제공되는 디스플레이 장치(2)(4)의 화면 해상도 정보를 토대로 입력장치(250)로부터 출력되는 패널 신호에 대한 평균값 검출 횟수를 조정한다. 상기 화면해상도가 고해상도로 변경되면, 상기 평균값 검출 횟수는 이전에 설정된 값보다 크게 조정된다. 반대로 상기 화면 해상도가 저해상도로 변경되면, 상기 평균값 검출 횟수는 이전에 설정된 값보다 작게 조정된다. The average value detection frequency adjusting unit 143 adjusts the average value detection frequency for the panel signal output from the input device 250 based on the screen resolution information of the display device 2 or 4 provided from the control unit 110. When the screen resolution is changed to a high resolution, the average number of times of detection is adjusted to be larger than a previously set value. On the contrary, when the screen resolution is changed to a low resolution, the average number of times of detection is adjusted to be smaller than a previously set value.
또한, 평균값 검출부(142)는 평균값 검출 횟수 조정부(143)에 의해 조정된 평균값 검출 횟수를 토대로 입력장치(250)로부터 전송되는 패널 신호의 평균값을 검출한다. 검출된 평균값은 조정된 패널 신호 발생부(144)로 전송된다. In addition, the average value detector 142 detects the average value of the panel signal transmitted from the input device 250 based on the average value detection frequency adjusted by the average value detection frequency adjustment unit 143. The detected average value is transmitted to the adjusted panel signal generator 144.
조정된 패널 신호 발생부(144)는 제어부(110)로부터 제공되는 디스플레이 장치(2)(4)의 변경된 화면 해상도 또는 가상 스크롤에 의해 변경된 디스플레이 화면의 위치 정보 및 현재 입력되는 패널 신호의 평균값을 이용하여 조정된 패널 신호를 발생한다. The adjusted panel signal generator 144 uses the average information of the position information of the display screen changed by the changed screen resolution or the virtual scroll of the display apparatus 2 or 4 provided from the controller 110 and the currently input panel signal. To generate an adjusted panel signal.
이때 본 발명에서는 제 1 입력장치(250-1)와 제 2 입력장치(250-2)가 구비되며, 따라서 상기 입력장치 구동부(140)에서는 제 1 입력장치(250-1)에 대한 신호 제어와 제 2 입력장치(250-2)의 신호 제어가 수행되게 된다. At this time, in the present invention, the first input device 250-1 and the second input device 250-2 are provided. Therefore, the input device driver 140 controls the signal of the first input device 250-1. Signal control of the second input device 250-2 is performed.
즉, 타임컨트롤러(125)와 제어부(110)의 제어에 의해 스위칭소자(145)는 제 1 입력장치(250-1)와 제 2 입력장치(250-2)가 교대로 입력장치 구동부(140))와 연결되도록 한다. That is, the first input device 250-1 and the second input device 250-2 alternately control the input device driver 140 by the control of the time controller 125 and the controller 110. )).
교대로 연결되도록 한다는 것은, 제 1 입력장치에(250-1)에서 발생하는 신호를 처리한 다음 제 2 입력장치에서 발생하는 신호를 처리한다는 것이며, 시간을 나누어 교대로 각각의 입력장치(250-1)(250-2)의 신호를 처리한 다는 것이다. Alternatingly connecting means processing the signal generated by the first input device 250-1 and then processing the signal generated by the second input device. 1) It processes the signal of 250-2.
그리고 이러한 시간 분할은 십분의 일초에서 만분의 일초 혹은 백만분의 일초등 매우 적은 시간으로 분할하기 때문에 사람의 손으로 정보를 입력하게 되는 경우 충분히 대응할 수 있게 된다.And this time division is divided into very small time, such as one tenth of a second to one thousandth of a second or one millionth of a second, so that when a user inputs information by a human hand, it can cope with enough.
물론 본 발명의 실시예에서 처럼 교대로 입력장치의 신호를 처리할 수도 있지만, 입력장치(250-1)(250-2) 제어부를 각각 구비하여 동시에 입력장치 신호를 제어하고 처리할 수도 있음은 당연하다.Of course, the signal of the input device may be alternately processed as in the embodiment of the present invention, but it is natural that the input device 250-1 and 250-2 may be respectively provided to control and process the input device signal. Do.
도 31은 본 발명의 순서도를 나타낸 도면이다. 31 is a flowchart showing the present invention.
본 발명의 표시장치가 작동이 되면, 본체 제어부(105)도 기능이 작동되어 각각의 장치를 구동하게 된다.(400단계) When the display device of the present invention is operated, the main body control unit 105 is also operated to drive each device (step 400).
본체 제어부(105) 내의 제어부(110)은 메모리(120)에 저장된 화면 표시 데이터 혹은 수신된 화면 표시 데이터를 분할하게 되며, 이때 이러한 기능은 제어부(105)의 제어에 의해 디스플레이 구동부(130)와 타임 콘트롤러(125)가 수행하게 된다.(도 28 및 도 29의 설명 참조) The controller 110 in the main body controller 105 divides the screen display data or the received screen display data stored in the memory 120. In this case, the function is controlled by the control unit 105 and the display driver 130. The controller 125 performs this operation (see the description of FIGS. 28 and 29).
따라서, 본체 제어부(105)는 화면을 분할하여 제 1 디스플레이와 제 2 디스플레이에 해당되는 화면 데이터 정보를 각각 전송하게 되는 것이다.(302 단계) Therefore, the main body controller 105 divides the screen and transmits screen data information corresponding to the first display and the second display, respectively (step 302).
그런 다음 도 30에 구비된 스위칭소자(145)에 의해 입력장치 구동부(140)는 제 1 입력장치(250-1)를 구동하게 된다. 즉, 제 1 입력장치에서 출력 되는 정보를 제어하게 된다.(404 단계) 그리고, 제 1 디스플레이(2)의 화면 표시 정보에 맞게 제 1 입력장치에서 출력된 정보를 제어한다.(406 단계) 그리고, 이러한 디스플레이 정보에 맞게 입력장치를 제어하는 방법은 도 30의 방법에 준한다. Then, the input device driver 140 drives the first input device 250-1 by the switching device 145 of FIG. 30. That is, it controls the information output from the first input device (step 404) and controls the information output from the first input device according to the screen display information of the first display 2 (step 406). The method of controlling the input device according to the display information follows the method of FIG. 30.
마찬가지로 스위칭소자(145)에 의해 입력장치 구동부가 제 2 입력장치에서 나오는 출력 신호를 제어하고(408 단계), 제 2 디스플레이의 화면 표시 정보에 맞게 제 2 입력장치의 신호를 제어하게 된다.(410 단계) 이 단계도 마찬가지로 도 30의 방법에 준한다. Similarly, the switching device 145 controls the input device driver to output an output signal from the second input device (step 408), and controls the signal of the second input device according to the screen display information of the second display. Step) This step also follows the method of FIG.
그리고, 정지 명령이 없으면 계속적으로 본체 제어부는 화면을 분할하고, 각각의 입력장치를 구동하게 되지만, 정지 명령이 있으면 이러한 일련의 수행 기능은 종료하게 된다.(412 및 414 단계)If there is no stop command, the main body controller continuously divides the screen and drives each input device, but if there is a stop command, the series of performing functions ends (steps 412 and 414).
즉, 본 발명에서는 입력장치 구동부는 제 1 디스플레이의 화면 정보에 맞게 제 1 입력 장치에서 출력된 정보를 제어 수행하고 제 2 디스플레이의 화면 정보에 맞게 제 2 입력 장치에서 출력된 정보를 제어 수행하며, 입력장치 구동부의 상기의 제어 수행 반복으로 인해 상기 두 개의 입력장치를 하나의 입력장치처럼 제어하게 되는 것이다. That is, in the present invention, the input device driver controls the information output from the first input device according to the screen information of the first display and controls the information output from the second input device according to the screen information of the second display. By repeating the above control execution of the input device driver, the two input devices are controlled as one input device.
- 실시예 2 - Example 2
도 32내지 도 37은 슬라이딩 구조의 또 다른 실시예를 나타낸 도면이다. 32 to 37 show another embodiment of the sliding structure.
도 32는 슬라이딩되어 화면이 확장되기 이전의 상태를 나타낸 도면이다. 32 is a diagram illustrating a state before the screen is expanded by sliding.
도면에서처럼 상부에 위치한 패널하우징(20)에 장착된 디스플레이(2)가 보이게 된다. 그리고, 상기의 상태로 휴대폰 기능을 할 수 있도록, 통화시 사용되는 스피커(101)와 전화 통화시 사용되는 마이크(102)등이 장착되게 된다. 아울러 선택 버튼(100) 등도 장착된다.As shown in the figure, the display 2 mounted on the panel housing 20 located above is shown. Then, the speaker 101 used during the call and the microphone 102 used during the phone call are mounted so that the mobile phone functions in the above state. In addition, the selection button 100 or the like is also mounted.
물론 본 발명의 휴대용 표시장치거 멀티미디어 기기로 사용되기 위해 소리를 크게 들을 필요가 있을 때에는, 부호 100번의 위체에 별도의 스피커가 장착될 수 있음은 물론이다. 그리고, 상기 디스플레이(2)의 이음매부(8) 측면을 보호하는 덮개의 기능을 하는 보호 덮개(51)가 구비된다.Of course, when the portable display device of the present invention needs to hear a loud sound in order to be used as a multimedia device, a separate speaker may be mounted on the 100 object. A protective cover 51 serving as a cover for protecting the side of the joint 8 of the display 2 is provided.
도 33은 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩된 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.33 is a view showing a state of sliding in the left and right directions.
도면에서처럼 상부 패널하우징(20)을 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동하면, 하부 패널하우징(40)에 장착된 하부 디스플레이(4)가 나타나게 된다. 그리고, 슬라이딩 이동은 하우징(50)의 안쪽 측면에 구비된 슬라이딩 홈(50a)을 통하여 이루워진다.As shown in the drawing, when the upper panel housing 20 is slid to the left and right directions, the lower display 4 mounted to the lower panel housing 40 appears. And, the sliding movement is made through the sliding groove (50a) provided on the inner side of the housing 50.
아울러, 상부 패널하우징(20)에서 이음매부(8) 반대 쪽에 또 다른 덮개(23)가 구비되며, 상기 보호 덮개(23)는 하부 디스플레이(4)의 이음매부(8) 측면을 보호한다. In addition, another cover 23 is provided on the opposite side of the joint 8 in the upper panel housing 20, and the protective cover 23 protects the side of the joint 8 of the lower display 4.
즉, 상부 패널하우징(20)에 구비된 외벽 형상으로 만들어진 덮개(23)는 하부 디스플레이(4)의 측면을 보호하고, 하부 패널하우징(40)에 구비된 덮개(51)는 상부 디스플레이(2)의 이음매부 측면을 보호한다.That is, the cover 23 formed in the outer wall shape provided on the upper panel housing 20 protects the side surface of the lower display 4, and the cover 51 provided on the lower panel housing 40 is the upper display 2. Protect the seam side of the.
도면에서 보면 덮개 혹은 외벽(51)의 안쪽 측면(51a)이 상부 디스플레이(2)의 이음매부 측면을 보호하는 것이다. In the figure, the inner side 51a of the cover or outer wall 51 protects the side of the seam of the upper display 2.
따라서, 상하부 디스플레이가 겹쳐져 닫혀진 상태에서는 디스플레이(2)(4) 이음매부 측면을 보호 덮개(23)(51)가 보호하고, 상하부 디스플레이가 슬라이딩 이동하게 되면 디스플레이(2)(4) 이음매부 측면을 보호하지 않게 된다. Accordingly, the protective cover 23, 51 protects the side surfaces of the display 2 and 4 joints while the upper and lower displays overlap, and the side surfaces of the display 2 and 4 joints are moved when the upper and lower displays slide. There is no protection.
즉, 디스플레이가 슬라이딩 이동함에 따라 디스플레이(2)(4) 이음매부 측면을 보호하는 보호 덮개(23)(51)가 연동되어 움직이는 것이다. That is, as the display slides, the protective covers 23 and 51 protecting the side surfaces of the joints 2 and 4 move together.
도 34는 상하 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동한 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.34 is a view showing a state in which the sliding movement in the vertical direction.
상부 패널하우지(20)을 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동한 후 다시 상하 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동하면, 상하 디스플레이(2)(4)가 서로 높이도 같고 상호 인접하게 된다.When the upper panel housing 20 is slidably moved in the left and right directions and then slidably moved in the vertical direction again, the upper and lower displays 2 and 4 have the same height and are adjacent to each other.
도 35와 도 36은 상하부 패널하우징을 분리한 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.35 and 36 are views illustrating a state in which the upper and lower panel housings are separated.
도 35는 상부 패널하우징(20)을 나태내고, 도 36은 하우징(50)과 하부 패널하우징(40)을 나타낸 도면이다.35 shows the upper panel housing 20, and FIG. 36 shows the housing 50 and the lower panel housing 40.
도면에서처럼 상부 패널하우징(20)에 구비된 슬라이이딩 돌기(21)가 슬라이딩 홈(50a)에 결합되어, 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)을 결합시키고 슬라이딩 이동하게 된다.As shown in the figure, the sliding protrusion 21 provided in the upper panel housing 20 is coupled to the sliding groove 50a, thereby coupling and sliding the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40.
한편, 하부 패널하우징(40)의 양 측면 즉, 하우징(50)의 안쪽 측벽에 구비된 홈(50a)은 이음매부(8) 부분에서는 곡선의 모양을 가진다. 따라서, 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 상하 이동을 할 때에는 곡선 이동을 하게 되는 것이다.On the other hand, the grooves 50a provided on both side surfaces of the lower panel housing 40, that is, the inner sidewalls of the housing 50, have a curved shape at the joint portion 8. Therefore, when the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 move vertically, the curved panel moves.
도 37은 슬라이딩 이동되는 구조를 나타낸 도면이다.37 is a view showing a sliding structure.
도 37에서 화살표 위에 있는 도면은 상하부 디스플레이(2)(4)가 겹쳐진 상태의 도면이고, 화살표 아래의 도면은 디스플레이가 펼쳐진 상태의 도면이다.The figure above the arrow in FIG. 37 is a figure with the upper and lower displays 2 and 4 superimposed, and the figure under an arrow is a figure with the display unfolded.
도면에서처럼 슬라이딩 홈(50a)이 이음매부(8) 부분에서는 곡선의 형상을 가지므로, 패널하우징(20)(40)이 좌우 이동을 할 때에는 직선 이동을 하지만 상하 이동을 할 때에는 곡선 이동을 하게 된다.As shown in the drawing, since the sliding groove 50a has a curved shape in the joint portion 8, the panel housings 20 and 40 move linearly when they move left and right, but when they move up and down, they move. .
그리고, 덮개(51)의 안쪽면(51a) 혹은 상부 패널하우징에 구비된 덮개(23) 안쪽 면도 곡면 형상을 갖게 되며, 따라서 덮개(51)(23)의 안쪽면과 맞닿는 패널하우징(20)(40)의 측벽(20a)(40a)도 곡면 형상을 가지게 된다. 당연히 상기 측벽(20a)(40a)은 이음매부가 있는 부분이다. In addition, the inner surface 51a of the lid 51 or the cover 23 provided on the upper panel housing may have a shaving curved surface shape, and thus the panel housing 20 which abuts with the inner surfaces of the lids 51 and 23 ( The side walls 20a and 40a of the 40 also have a curved shape. Naturally, the side walls 20a and 40a are portions having seams.
도 38내지 도 40은 하부 패널하우징이 슬라이딩 이동되는 실시예의 도면이다.38 to 40 are views of an embodiment in which the lower panel housing is slidingly moved.
도 38은 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 상호 겹쳐진 상태의 도면이다. 겹쳐진 상태에서는 전화가 가능하도록 통화시 사용되는 스피커(101)와 마이크(102)가 구비된다.38 is a view showing the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 overlapping each other. In the overlapped state, the speaker 101 and the microphone 102 which are used at the time of making a call are provided.
그리고, 상부 디스플레이(2)의 이음매부(8) 측면을 보호하는 보호 덮개(43)에는 손잡이(45)가 구비된다. 상기 손잡이(45)는 덮개(43) 표면에 긴 돌기 혹은 긴 홈 형상을 가져서, 손으로 외벽 혹은 덮개(43)를 잡고 슬라이딩 이동시킬 때 손에 잘 잡히도록 하기 위함이다.In addition, a handle 45 is provided on the protective cover 43 that protects the side surface of the joint 8 of the upper display 2. The handle 45 has a long protrusion or a long groove shape on the surface of the cover 43 so as to be easily held by the hand when the outer wall or the cover 43 is gripped and moved by hand.
아울러, 상부 디스플레이(2)의 이음매부(8) 측면을 하부 패널하우징(40)과 연결된 덮개(43)가 보호하게 된다. In addition, the cover 43 connected to the lower panel housing 40 protects the side surface of the joint part 8 of the upper display 2.
도 39는 하부 패널하우징(40)을 슬라이딩 이동한 상태의 도면이다. 도면에서처럼 하부 패널하우징(40)이 슬라이딩 이동되면, 보호 덮개(43)가 상부 디스플레이 이음매부(8) 측면을 보호하지 않게 된다, 39 is a view of a state in which the lower panel housing 40 is slid. When the lower panel housing 40 is slid and moved as shown in the drawing, the protective cover 43 does not protect the upper display seam 8 side.
또한, 하우징(50)의 안쪽면에 형성된 슬라이딩 돌기(50a)도 곡션의 모양을 가진다. 즉 하부 패널하우징(40)이 좌우 이동을 할 때에는 직선 운동을 하지만 상하 방향으로 이동할 때에는 곡선 운동을 하는 것이다. In addition, the sliding protrusion 50a formed on the inner surface of the housing 50 also has the shape of a curvature. In other words, when the lower panel housing 40 moves left and right, the linear panel moves, but when the lower panel housing 40 moves, the lower panel housing 40 performs the curved motion.
따라서, 도 37에서처럼 덮개(43)의 안쪽 면은 곡면의 형상을 가지고, 덮개(43)의 안쪽 면과 맞 닿는 패널하우징(20)의 이음매부 측벽도 곡면 형상을 가지게 된다.Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the inner surface of the cover 43 has a curved shape, and the side wall of the joint portion of the panel housing 20 which contacts the inner surface of the cover 43 also has a curved shape.
한편, 도면에서는 생략되었지만 디스플레이(2)(4)가 상하로 적층될 때에, 하부 디스플레이(4)의 이음매부 측면은 하우징(50) 혹은 상부 패널하우징(20)에 연장되어 구비된 보호 덮개가 보호함은 당연하다. Meanwhile, although omitted in the drawing, when the displays 2 and 4 are stacked up and down, the side of the seam of the lower display 4 extends to the housing 50 or the upper panel housing 20 to be protected. Of course.
도 40은 디스플레이가 완전히 펼쳐진 상태의 도면이다. 즉, 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 겹쳐진 상태(도 38)에서 하부 패널하우징(40)이 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동한 다음(도 39)에, 상 방향으로 곡선 이동하여 두 개의 디스플레이(2)(4)가 완전히 확장되게 되며, 결과적으로 두 개의 디스플레이(2)(4)가 높이가 같은 상태(도 40)가 되게 된다. 40 is a diagram with the display fully extended. That is, in the state where the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 overlap (FIG. 38), the lower panel housing 40 slides in the left and right directions (FIG. 39), and then the two panels (2) are curved in the upward direction. 4 is fully expanded, resulting in two displays 2 and 4 having the same height (FIG. 40).
- 실시예 3 - Example 3
도 41내지 도 52는 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.41 through 52 are diagrams of yet another embodiment.
도 41은 패널하우징이 적층상태로 있는 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.41 is a view of another embodiment in which the panel housing is in a stacked state.
화살표 A 방향으로 상부 패널하우징이 슬라이딩 이동하는 것이며, 이때 상부 디스플레이(2)의 이음매부(8)는 덮개(43)로 보호한다. The upper panel housing slides in the direction of arrow A, and the seam 8 of the upper display 2 is protected by the lid 43.
도 42는 상부 패널하우징이 슬라이딩 되어 확장된 상태이다.42 is a state in which the upper panel housing is slid and expanded.
패널하우징(20)(40)이 확장되면서 이음매부(8)를 덮개(43)가 덮지를 않게 되고, 하부 패널하우징(40)에 장착된 하부 디스플레이(4)가 보이게 된다.As the panel housings 20 and 40 are expanded, the cover 43 is not covered by the joint part 8, and the lower display 4 mounted on the lower panel housing 40 is visible.
도 43은 두 개의 디스플레이가 완전히 확장된 상태의 도면이다.43 is a diagram with two displays fully extended.
도 42에서 화살표 B 방향 즉 아래 방향으로 상부 패널하우징(20)이 이동하게 되면, 도 43의 상태가 되는 것이다. In FIG. 42, when the upper panel housing 20 moves in the direction of arrow B, that is, downward, the state of FIG. 43 is obtained.
본 발명에서는 하부 덮개(43a)가 하부 패널하우징(40)의 측면에서 상하 방향으로 이동하게 되는 구조로 되어 있다. 즉, 하부 덮개(43a)가 아래 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동하면 하부 덮개(43a) 상단에 있는 상부 패널하우징(20)도 아래로 움직이게 된다.In the present invention, the lower cover 43a is configured to move in the vertical direction from the side of the lower panel housing 40. That is, when the lower cover 43a slides downward, the upper panel housing 20 on the top of the lower cover 43a also moves downward.
즉, 하부 덮개(43a)는 하부 패널하우징(40) 측면에 구비되어 하부 디스플레이(4) 이음매부(8)를 보호한다. 하지만 하부 덮개(43a)가 아래 방향으로 이동하게 되면서, 하부 디스플레이(4) 이음매부를 보호하지 않게 되고, 결과적으로 상하부 디스플레이(2)(4)가 서로 인접하게 되는 구조를 가지게 된다.That is, the lower cover 43a is provided at the side of the lower panel housing 40 to protect the seam 8 of the lower display 4. However, as the lower cover 43a is moved downward, the lower display 4 does not protect the seam, and as a result, the upper and lower displays 2 and 4 are adjacent to each other.
도 44와 도 45는 상부 패널하우징을 제거한 상태를 나타낸 도면이다.44 and 45 are views illustrating a state in which the upper panel housing is removed.
도면에서처럼 하부 덮개(43a) 상단에 슬라이딩 수단으로서 돌기 판(71)이 구비된다. 상기 돌기 판(71)는 상부 패널하우징(20)을 지지하면서 상부 패널하우징(20)을 슬라이딩 이동 가능하게 하는 것으로서, 슬라이딩 이동은 돌기(72)가 역할을 하게 된다. As shown in the figure, a projection plate 71 is provided on the upper end of the lower cover 43a as a sliding means. The protrusion plate 71 allows the upper panel housing 20 to slide while supporting the upper panel housing 20, and the protrusion 72 plays a role in sliding movement.
즉, 금속, 합금 혹은 강화 플라스틱 등으로 만들어진 판상 모양의 구조물이 상부 패널하우징을 지지하고 이동하게 되는 것이 본 발명의 실시예의 기본 구조가 된다.That is, the basic structure of the embodiment of the present invention is that the plate-shaped structure made of metal, alloy or reinforced plastic supports and moves the upper panel housing.
그리고, 상기 돌기 판(71)은 판 고정부(75)를 통해 하부 덮개(43a) 상단에 견고하게 고정된다. 이때, 고정부(75)는 돌기 판(71)에 구비된 돌기판 홈(73)을 통해 고정되며, 상기 돌기판 홈(73)은 오목부(74)에 형성된다. In addition, the protrusion plate 71 is firmly fixed to the upper end of the lower cover 43a through the plate fixing part 75. At this time, the fixing portion 75 is fixed through the projection plate groove 73 provided in the projection plate 71, the projection plate groove 73 is formed in the recess 74.
오목부(74)는 돌기판(71) 표면 보다 낮게 형성되어, 돌기판(71)에 고정된 고정부(75)가 돌기판(71)의 표면보다 높아지지 않게 되는 것이다. The recessed portion 74 is formed lower than the surface of the protrusion plate 71 so that the fixing portion 75 fixed to the protrusion plate 71 does not become higher than the surface of the protrusion plate 71.
이때, 슬라이딩 수단이 되는 돌기 판(71)과 고정부(75)는 금속 혹은 합금 등으로 구성되어 내구성이 있게 한다.At this time, the projection plate 71 and the fixing portion 75 which is a sliding means is made of a metal or alloy, etc. to make it durable.
도 46은 상부 패널하우징의 아래 부분을 나타낸 도면이다.46 shows the lower part of the upper panel housing.
상부 패널하우징(20) 하부에는 다리(20b)가 구비되어 상부 패널하우징의 바닥면 보다 더 높게 형성된다. 따라서, 상부 패널하우징(20) 바닥 부분에서 돌기판(71)이 슬라이딩 이동할 수 있는 공간이 만들어지게 된다. A leg 20b is provided below the upper panel housing 20 so as to be formed higher than the bottom surface of the upper panel housing. Therefore, a space in which the protrusion plate 71 is slid and moved in the bottom portion of the upper panel housing 20 is made.
그리고 상부 패널하우징(20) 바닥에는 바닥 홈(80)이 형성되고, 상기 바닥 홈(80)에 돌기판(71)의 돌기(72)가 맞물려서 슬라이딩 이동하게 되는 것이다. A bottom groove 80 is formed at the bottom of the upper panel housing 20, and the protrusion 72 of the protrusion plate 71 is engaged with the bottom groove 80 so as to slide.
그리고 상기 바닥홈(80)은 바닥판(81)에 의해 만들어 진다.And the bottom groove 80 is made by the bottom plate (81).
도 47과 도 48은 상부 패널하우징에서 바닥판을 제거한 상태의 도면이다.47 and 48 are views of the bottom plate removed from the upper panel housing.
상부 패널하우징 바닥에 단차(84)를 주어 일정 공간이 형성되고 형성된 공간에 걸게(83)가 형성되고, 바닥판(81) 뒤에 형성된 고리(82)가 걸게(83)에 견고하게 고정된다. Steps 84 are provided at the bottom of the upper panel housing to form a predetermined space and a hook 83 is formed in the formed space, and a ring 82 formed behind the bottom plate 81 is firmly fixed to the hook 83.
도 49와 50은 하부 덮개를 제거한 상태의 도면이다.49 and 50 are views with the lower cover removed.
하부 패널하우징(40)에서 하부 덮개(43a)를 제거하면, 하부 패널하우징(40)의 이음매부에 구비된 상하 이동수단이 나타나게 된다. 상기 상하 이동수단은 하부 패널하우징(40)에서 하부 덮개(43a)를 위 아래 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동할 수 있도록 한다.When the lower cover 43a is removed from the lower panel housing 40, the vertical movement means provided in the joint portion of the lower panel housing 40 appears. The vertical movement means allows the lower cover 43a to slide in the upper and lower directions in the lower panel housing 40.
그리고, 상기 상하 이동수단은 지지판(90)으로 구성되고 상기 지지판(90) 양 옆에 스프링 장치(91)가 더 구비된다. 지지판(90) 양 옆에 내부 홈(90a)이 구비되고, 내부 바닥(92) 도 구비된다.In addition, the vertical movement means is composed of a support plate 90, the spring device 91 is further provided on both sides of the support plate 90. Inner grooves 90a are provided at both sides of the support plate 90, and an inner bottom 92 is also provided.
도 51과 도 52는 하부 덮개의 결합부를 나타낸 도면이다.51 and 52 are views showing the coupling portion of the lower cover.
도면에서 보면 하부 덮개(43a)의 측면이 패널하우징(40)의 측면과 결합되는 구조를 알 수 있다. In the figure it can be seen that the side of the lower cover 43a is coupled to the side of the panel housing 40.
하부 덮개(43a) 양 측면에 덮개 공간(94) 이 형성되고, 상기 덮개 공간(94)에 결합부(95)가 구비된다. 상기 결합부(95)는 머리(95a)와 부착부(95b)로 형성되고, 상기 부착부(95b)를 통해 결합부(95)가 내부 공간(94)에 고정되게 된다.(동그랗게 원모양으로 표시된 부분에 접착제, 나사, 결합 돌기 등을 구비하여 고정하게 되는 것이다.) Cover spaces 94 are formed on both side surfaces of the lower cover 43a, and coupling portions 95 are provided in the cover space 94. The coupling portion 95 is formed of a head 95a and an attachment portion 95b, and the coupling portion 95 is fixed to the internal space 94 through the attachment portion 95b. It will be fixed with adhesives, screws, engaging projections, etc. on the marked part.)
따라서 상기 결합부(95)가 지지판(90) 양 옆의 내부홈(90a)과 맞물려 이동하게 된다. 내부 바닥(92)에 의해 결합부(95)의 이동이 제한되게 된다. 즉, 하부 덮개(43a)가 필요 이상으로 아래로 내려가는 것을 방지하게 된다. 그리고, 스프링(91)에 의해서 하부 덮개(43a)가 다시 원상태로 쉽게 이동 될 수 있게 되는 것이다.Therefore, the coupling portion 95 is engaged with the inner groove (90a) on both sides of the support plate 90 to move. The movement of the coupling portion 95 is limited by the inner bottom 92. In other words, the lower lid 43a is prevented from falling downward more than necessary. And, by the spring 91 will be able to easily move back to the lower cover (43a).
- 실시예 4 - Example 4
도 53은 두 개 패널하우징의 단면도이다. 53 is a sectional view of two panel housings.
도면에서처럼 패널하우징(20)(40)의 두께를 서로 다르게 해도 됨은 물론이다. 앞의 실시예 도 32에서 도 34의 경우에서는 상부 패널하우징(20)이 더 얇게 형성될 수도 있는 실시예의 구조이다. 본 발명에서 패널하우징(20)(40)은 휴대용 표시장치에서 케이스 역할을 한다.As shown in the drawing, the panel housings 20 and 40 may have different thicknesses. In the case of FIGS. 32 to 34, the upper panel housing 20 may have a thinner structure. In the present invention, the panel housings 20 and 40 serve as cases in the portable display device.
얇게 형성된 패널하우징(20)의 바닥 부분(도면에서 화살표로"0" 로 표시)의 상부에 바로 디스플레이(2) 및 입력장치(200)가 구비되고, The display 2 and the input device 200 are directly provided on the upper portion of the bottom portion of the thinly formed panel housing 20 (indicated by the arrows "0" in the drawing).
그리고, 두껍게 형성된 패널하우징(40)의 디스플레이 하부에 구비된 본체 부품부(25)에 밧테리나 본체 제어부 등 부품이 구비되게 된다. Then, parts such as a battery or a main body control unit are provided in the main body part 25 provided at the lower part of the display of the panel housing 40 formed thickly.
당연히 디스플레이(2) 등을 받쳐주는 받침부(26)(46)가 구비될 수 있다. Naturally, the supporting parts 26 and 46 supporting the display 2 and the like may be provided.
도 54는 두개 패널하우징의 두께가 비슷한 경우의 단면도이다. Fig. 54 is a sectional view when the two panel housings have similar thicknesses.
도 12에서도 18의 경우, 도시 편의상 하나의 패널하우징(20)에 대한 단면도를 나타내었다. 그 이유는 또 다른 패널하우징(40)의 구조도 유사하게 구비되어 대칭 구조를 이루기 때문이다. 12 also shows a cross-sectional view of one panel housing 20 for convenience of illustration. The reason for this is that another panel housing 40 is similarly provided to form a symmetrical structure.
도 54는 이러한 대칭 구조의 한 예를 나타낸 실시예 도면이다. 이러한 대칭 구조가 도 12에서 도 18까지 모두 적용됨은 당연하다. 54 is an embodiment diagram showing an example of such a symmetrical structure. Naturally, this symmetrical structure is applied to all of FIGS. 12 to 18.
그러나 대칭 구조를 이룬다고, 각각의 패널하우징에 장착되는 부품마저 같은 것은 아니다. 즉, 디스플레이(2)(4)와 입력장치(200)(400)및 디스플레이와 입력장치가 관련된 부품 등은 두 개의 패널하우징(20)(40)에 모두 구비된다. However, the symmetrical structure does not mean that even the parts mounted on each panel housing are the same. That is, the display 2, 4, the input device 200, 400, and the parts related to the display and the input device are provided in both panel housings 20, 40.
하지만, 도 27에 도시된 본체 제어부(105)나 밧테리(편의상 도시생략) 같은 부품은 두 개의 패널하우징에 모두 구비될 필요는 없는 것이다.즉, 부품부(25)(45)에서 한쪽 부품부(25)에는 밧테리가 장착되고, 또 다른 부품부(45)에는 본체 제어부(105)가 장착될 수가 있는 것이다. However, parts such as the main body control unit 105 and the battery (not shown for convenience) shown in FIG. 27 need not be provided in both panel housings. The battery 25 is mounted, and the main body control part 105 can be mounted to the other parts 45.
한편, 도 53과 도54에서 처럼 패널하우징이 펼쳐 질 때에 두개의 디스플레이(2)(4) 사이에 보호필름(14)이 구비될 수 있지만, 앞의 실시예에서 처럼 디스플레이(2)(4) 사이에 패널하우징 측벽(20a)(40a)이 구비될 수 있음은 당연하다. 이때, 패널하우징 측벽의 두께는 1.5mm 가 넘지 않는 것이 좋다. On the other hand, when the panel housing is unfolded as shown in Figs. 53 and 54, a protective film 14 may be provided between the two displays 2 and 4, but as shown in the previous embodiment, the display 2 and 4 may be provided. Naturally, the panel housing sidewalls 20a and 40a may be provided between them. At this time, the thickness of the panel housing sidewall is preferably not more than 1.5mm.
도 55 내지 도 57은 프레임 하우징을 구비한 실시예의 도면이다.55 to 57 show an embodiment with a frame housing.
도 55에서처럼 하부 패널하우징(20)에는 밧테리나 본체 회로부가 장착되고 그 상단에 프레임 하우징(20-1) 혹은 브라킷(bracket)(20-1)이 장착된다. 이때, 상기 프레임 하우징(20-1)에 디스플레이가 장착되는 것이다. As shown in FIG. 55, the lower panel housing 20 is equipped with a battery or a main body circuit portion, and a frame housing 20-1 or a bracket 20-1 is mounted on the upper panel housing. At this time, the display is mounted on the frame housing 20-1.
그리고, 상기 디스플레이(2)가 상기 프레임 하우징(20-1)에 장착될 때 이음매부(8)에 더 가깝게 장착되게 되는 것이다. 여기서 이음매부는 디스플레이가(2)(4)가 상호 연결되는 부분이다. 즉, 상기 디스플레이(2)에서 화면이 표시되는 부분을 액티브 에어리어(active area)(2-1)라고 할 때, 상기 액티브 에어리어(2-1)가 프레임 하우징(20-1)의 이음매부 반대쪽 보다도 이음매부(8)에 더 가깝게 장착되는 것이다. When the display 2 is mounted on the frame housing 20-1, the display 2 is mounted closer to the joint 8. Here, the seam is a portion where the displays 2 and 4 are interconnected. That is, when a portion of the display 2 on which the screen is displayed is called an active area 2-1, the active area 2-1 is larger than the opposite side of the joint of the frame housing 20-1. It is mounted closer to the seam 8.
그리고 그 상단에 보호판 혹은 입력장치(200)가 장착된다. 그리고 입력장치(200)에서 정보를 입력할 수 있는 면적을 액티브 에어리어(Active area)(200-1)라고 할 수 있고, 도 55의 부호 200번에서 하얀색으로 나타낸 부분이 된다. And the protection plate or the input device 200 is mounted on the top. The area in which information can be input from the input device 200 may be referred to as an active area 200-1, which is indicated by white color at 200 in FIG. 55.
또한, 상기 입력장치의 액티브 에어리어(200-1)도 이음매부 반대쪽 보다도 이음매부에 더 가깝게 장착된다. The active area 200-1 of the input device is also mounted closer to the seam than to the seam opposite.
도 55에서 L-L 방향 단면도는 도 56이고, K-K 방향 단면도는 도 57이다. 도면에서 보면 프레임 하우징(20-1)의 주변에 보호판 혹은 입력장치가 장착됨을 보인다. 그리고, 디스플레이(2)와 프레임 하우징 사이에 받침부(30-1)가 장착되어, 디스플레이를 지지하거나 충격을 흡수하는 역할을 한다.In FIG. 55, the L-L direction cross section is FIG. 56, and the K-K direction cross section is FIG. 57. In the drawings, it is shown that a protective plate or an input device is mounted around the frame housing 20-1. In addition, the supporting part 30-1 is mounted between the display 2 and the frame housing to support the display or absorb shock.
도면에서 프레임 하우징(20-1)의 하부는 부분적으로 절개될 수도 있다.(도 56과 도 57의 도면 아래 에서에서 D 로 표시된 만큼의 절개가 가능하다.)In the drawing, the lower part of the frame housing 20-1 may be partially cut. (As shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, as indicated by D, the cut may be possible.)
도 58은 디스플레이가 상호 인접되는 구조를 나타낸 모양이다.58 shows a structure in which the displays are adjacent to each other.
두개의 패널하우징(20)(40)이 상호 인접될 때 하나의 패널하우징의 높이가 다른 패널하우징의 높이보다 더 높은 것을 나타내는 실시예의 도면이다. This is a diagram of an embodiment showing that when the two panel housings 20 and 40 are adjacent to each other, the height of one panel housing is higher than the height of the other panel housing.
도면에서 높이가 낮은 패널하우징(20)이 하부에는 디스플레이(20)가 바로 장착되는데, 이때 패널하우징 하부와 디스플레이(20) 사이에 받침부(30-1)가 구비될 수 있다. 그리고 상기 받치부는 충격을 흡수하는 보호판 역할도 가능하다. 상기 보호판(30-1)은 패널하우징 디스플레이 사이에 전체 적으로 구비될 수 있고, 디스플레이와 패널하우징 사이에 부분적으로 구비될 수도 있다. In the drawing, the panel housing 20 having a low height is directly mounted on the lower portion of the panel housing 20. At this time, a support part 30-1 may be provided between the panel housing lower portion and the display 20. The support part may also serve as a protective plate for absorbing shock. The protective plate 30-1 may be provided as a whole between the panel housing display, or may be partially provided between the display and the panel housing.
또한 상기 패널하우징(20) 하부와 디스플레이(2) 사이의 거리는 2mm 이내로 한다. 그리고, 상기 패널하우징의 아래부터 보호판 혹은 입력장치(200)까지의 길이 H1 도 10mm 이내로 한다. 그러나 박형화가 실현되면 디스플레이는 1.5mm 이내, 패널하우징 두께 1mm 이내 보호판을 포함한 입력장치의 두께 1.5mm 이내로 하면 H1은 4 mm 이내에서 5mm 이내로 가능하다. 즉, 휴대폰일 경우와 태블릿 PC 일 경우에 따라 H1의 크기도 다를 수 있다. In addition, the distance between the lower panel housing 20 and the display 2 is within 2mm. The length H1 from the bottom of the panel housing to the protective plate or the input device 200 is also within 10 mm. However, when thinning is realized, the display can be within 1.5mm, the panel housing thickness within 1mm, and the input device including the protective plate within 1.5mm in thickness. H1 can be within 4mm and within 5mm. That is, the size of H1 may be different depending on the case of a mobile phone and a tablet PC.
한편, 패널하우징(20) 하부에 디스플레이를 바로 접촉하게 장착해도 된다, 이 경우에는 패널하우징 하부와 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0mm 가 된다.On the other hand, the display may be mounted directly under the panel housing 20, in which case the distance between the panel housing lower and the display is 0 mm.
아울러, 높이가 더 두꺼운 패널하우징의 높이 H2 는 8 - 12mm 이내 혹은 상황에 따라 16 - 25mm 정도가 될 수도 있다.In addition, the height H2 of the thicker panel housing may be within 8-12 mm or 16-25 mm depending on the situation.
만일 H1이 3-5mm 이고 H2가 7 15 mm 라면, H1/ H2 의 비율은 0.20(3/15)에서 0.71(5/7)가 된다고 할 수 있다.  If H1 is 3-5mm and H2 is 7 15mm, the ratio of H1 / H2 is 0.20 (3/15) to 0.71 (5/7).
또한, 디스플레이가 상호 연결 되는 부분에 보호수단(14)이 구비되며, 상기 보호수단은 별도의 보호판 혹은 보호 필름일 수도 있고, 패널하우징(20)(40)과 연결된 측벽일 수도 있고, 프레임하우징(40-1)과 연결된 측벽일 수도 있다.In addition, the protection means 14 is provided in the portion where the display is interconnected, the protection means may be a separate protective plate or a protective film, may be a side wall connected to the panel housing 20, 40, frame housing ( It may also be a side wall connected to 40-1).
또한, 디스플레이가 연결되는 부분에서 상기 보포판 혹은 측벽의 두께와 디스플레이와 입력장치의 배치는 본 발명의 다른 실시예에 준한다.In addition, the thickness of the perforated plate or the side wall at the portion where the display is connected, and the arrangement of the display and the input device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
도 59에서 도 62는 디스플레이가 장착되는 방법을 나타낸 도면이다.59 to 62 illustrate a method of mounting a display.
디스플레이(2)에서 유리 혹은 플라스틱으로 되어 화면을 나타내는 부품을 디스플레이 패널(2a)이라고 하고, 디스플레이 패널(2a) 배면부에 백라이트(2b)가 구비된다고 했을 때, OLED 소자는 백라이트(2b)가 없게 된다. 그리고 도면에서 구동부 회로는 도시 편의상 생략하였다. When a part of the display 2, which is made of glass or plastic and represents a screen, is referred to as a display panel 2a, and the backlight 2b is provided on the rear surface of the display panel 2a, the OLED element does not have a backlight 2b. . In the drawings, the driver circuit is omitted for convenience of illustration.
이때, 상기 디스플레이가 패널하우징(20) 혹은 프레임 하우징(20-1)에 구비될 때, 도 59와 도 60에서 처럼 샤시 혹은 기구물에 디스플레이가 장착된 상태에서 구비될 수가 있다, 이때 디스플레이가 LCD이면 디스플레이 패널(2a)과 백라이트(2b)가 있고 OLED 이면 디스플레이 패널(2a) 만 있게 된다.(구동부는 공통 부분이므로 설명에서 생략함.) In this case, when the display is provided in the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1, the display may be provided in a state in which the display is mounted on the chassis or the apparatus as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60. There is a display panel 2a and a backlight 2b, and if it is an OLED, there is only a display panel 2a. (The driving part is a common part and thus is omitted from the description.)
한편, 도 61과 도 62에서처럼 디스플레이가 패널하우징(20) 혹은 프레임 하우징(20-1)에 바로 장착되는 경우도 있다.61 and 62, the display may be directly mounted to the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1.
이때, 디스플레이(2)와 패널하우징(20) 혹은 프레임 하우징(20-1) 사이의 간격은 2mm 이내이며, 경우에 따라서는 간격이 없어 0 mm 일 수도 있다. 그리고 상기 간격 사이에 받침판(30-1)이 구비된다.In this case, an interval between the display 2 and the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1 may be 2 mm or less, and in some cases, no gap may be 0 mm. And the supporting plate (30-1) is provided between the intervals.
그리고, 디스플레이(2)가 패널하우징(20)에 혹은 프레임 하우징(20-1)에 바로 장착될 경우, OLED 소자의 또 다른 실시예를 생각할 수 있다. 즉, 도 62에서 화살표 윗 부분의 도면은 OLED 소자가 하우징(20)(20-1)에 바로 장착될 수 있음을 보인다. And, when the display 2 is mounted directly to the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1, another embodiment of the OLED device can be considered. That is, the figure above the arrow in FIG. 62 shows that the OLED element can be mounted directly to the housing 20, 20-1.
하지만, 또 다른 실시예를 도 62의 화살표 아래 부분의 도면에 나타내었다. 즉 OLED 하부 기판(도 9에서 부호 52번)의 기능을 패널하우징(20)이나 프레임 하우징(20-1)(화살표 아래의 도면에서는 빗금 부분)이 대신할 수가 있다. 경우에 따라서는 패널하우징 기판이나 프레임 하우징 기판을 금속 재질로 할 수가 있으며, 이 경우에는 상기 패널하우징(20)이나 프레임 하우징(20-1)이 OLED의 한쪽 기판을 대신할 수가 있다. 그렇게 하면 표시장치의 두께를 더 얇게 할 수가 있는 것이다.Yet another embodiment is shown in the figure below the arrow in FIG. In other words, the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1 (hatched portion in the figure below the arrow) can replace the function of the OLED lower substrate (No. 52 in FIG. 9). In some cases, the panel housing substrate or the frame housing substrate may be made of a metal material. In this case, the panel housing 20 or the frame housing 20-1 may replace one substrate of the OLED. By doing so, the thickness of the display device can be made thinner.
- 실시예 5 - Example 5
도 63은 휴대폰으로 사용할 경우의 실시예의 도면이다.63 is a diagram of an embodiment when using as a mobile phone.
통화시에는 사용되는 스피커(101)와 마이크(102)가 사용되지만, 전화번호 등을 입력할 때에는 화면에 입력 자판(256)이 표시될 수 있게 된다. 화면에서는 다수개의 박스(Box) 형태로 되었지만, 상기 박스 안에 숫자 문자 기호 등이 표시됨은 당연하다.While the speaker 101 and the microphone 102 are used during the call, the input keyboard 256 can be displayed on the screen when a telephone number or the like is input. Although the screen is in the form of a plurality of boxes (Box), it is obvious that a number character symbol or the like is displayed in the box.
그리고 간단한 버튼(100)이 구비될 수도 있고. 버튼(100)의 위치에 큰 소리를 낼 수 있는 별도 스피커가 구비될 수 있음은 당연하다. And a simple button 100 may be provided. Naturally, a separate speaker that can make a loud sound at the position of the button 100 may be provided.
도 64는 문자 입력 등으로 사용할 때의 실시예의 도면이다. 64 is a diagram of an embodiment when used for character input or the like.
두 개의 디스플레이(2)(4)를 확장하여, 데이터 통신 및 정보 이용 등 다양한 컨텐츠를 사용할 경우에는 한쪽 화면에 만 입력 자판(255)이 표시될 수도 있다. 이 경우의 입력 자판(255)은 한글 자모 혹은 알파벳 등이 모두 표시되는 자판 입력 기능을 할 수 있는 자판 모양이 화면에 표시되는 것이다. 그러면 사용자가 원하는 글자가 표시된 부분을 터치하게 되면, 입력장치(200)(400)가 정보를 인식할 수가 있는 것이다.When the two displays 2 and 4 are extended to use various contents such as data communication and information use, the input keyboard 255 may be displayed on only one screen. In this case, the input keyboard 255 displays a keyboard shape that can function as a keyboard input function in which both Korean alphabet and alphabet are displayed. Then, when the user touches a portion where a desired letter is displayed, the input apparatus 200 or 400 may recognize the information.
한편, 본 발명에서는 정전용량 방식과 저항막 방식의 입력장치를 예로 들었지만, 평판 형태의 판 위에 정보를 입력하는 입력장치는 본 발명의 원리에 그대로 적용되어 사용될 수 있음은 당연하다. Meanwhile, in the present invention, although the capacitive type and the resistive type input devices are taken as an example, it is obvious that the input device for inputting information on a flat plate may be used as it is.
도 65는 결합 센서에 따른 입력 자판 모드의 순서도를 나타낸 도면이다. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an input keyboard mode according to a combined sensor.
본 발명의 휴대용 표시장치가 작동이 되면, 도 27의 센서(135)가 패널하우징(20)(40)이 결합 상태인가를 판단하게 된다. 여기서 결합 상태라는 것은 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)이 상하로 적층 상태로 있다는 것이다.When the portable display device of the present invention is operated, the sensor 135 of FIG. 27 determines whether the panel housings 20 and 40 are coupled. Here, the coupled state means that the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 are stacked up and down.
그리고 화면에서 입력 자판을 나타나도록 하는 표시를 선택하게 되면(455 단계), 센서(135)에 의해 결합상태인가를 판단하게 된다.(460 단계) When the display is selected to display the input keyboard on the screen (step 455), it is determined by the sensor 135 whether it is in the engaged state (step 460).
만일 채널하우징이 결합상태라면 A 타입 자판이 화면에 표시된다.(470단계) 이때, A 타입 자판은 도 63의 실시예에 나타난 타입이다. 결합 상태가 아니라면 B 타입 자판이 화면에 표시된다.(465단계) 이때, B 타입 자판은 도 64의 실시예에 나타난 타입이다. If the channel housing is in the coupled state, the type A keyboard is displayed on the screen (step 470). At this time, the type A keyboard is the type shown in the embodiment of FIG. If not, the B-type keyboard is displayed on the screen (step 465). At this time, the B-type keyboard is the type shown in the embodiment of FIG.
사용자가 종료 선택을 하게 되면, 시스템이 종료된다.(475단계)If the user selects to exit, the system is shut down (step 475).
이상과 같이 상하 패널하우징(20)(40)의 결합상태에 따라 화면에 표시되는 상태를 자동으로 제어할 수 있게 되는 것이다.As described above, it is possible to automatically control the state displayed on the screen according to the coupling state of the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40.
도 66은 결합 센서에 따른 순서도를 나타낸 도면이다. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a coupling sensor.
본 발명의 휴대용 표시장치가 작동되면 도 27의 블럭도에 도시된 센서(135)에 의해 패널하우징(20)(40)이 결합 상태인가를 판단한다.(485단계) When the portable display device of the present invention is operated, it is determined whether the panel housings 20 and 40 are coupled by the sensor 135 shown in the block diagram of FIG. 27 (step 485).
결합이 되었으면 상부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 구동된다. 그리고 하나의 디스플레이를 구동하기 위한 화면 포맷(Format)이 선택된다.(490 단계) 결합이 되지 않았으면 두 개 디스플레이가 모두 구동되며, 두 개의 디스플레이를 구동하기 위한 화면 포맷(Format)이 선택된다.(495단계) Once assembled, the display mounted on the top panel housing is driven. A screen format for driving one display is selected (step 490). If not combined, both displays are driven, and a screen format for driving two displays is selected. (Step 495)
본 발명의 표시장치는 하나의 화면만으로 사용할 수 있고, 또한 두 개의 화면 만으로 사용할 수가 있다. 따라서 도 27에 도시된 본체제어부(105)의 메모리(120)에 한 개의 화면을 표시하기 위한 화면 포맷과 두 개의 화면을 표시하기 위한 화면 포맷을 저장하게 된다. 그리고, 센서(135)의 감지에 위해 제어부(110)는 그에 맞는 화면 포맷을 선택하게 되는 것이다. The display device of the present invention can be used with only one screen and can be used with only two screens. Therefore, the screen format for displaying one screen and the screen format for displaying two screens are stored in the memory 120 of the main body controller 105 shown in FIG. 27. In addition, the controller 110 selects a screen format suitable for the detection of the sensor 135.
화면이 선택되면 선택된 화면에 따라 제어부(110)가 화면 표시를 제어하게 되는 것이다. 즉, 하나의 화면을 표시할 때의 제어 모드와 두 개의 화면을 표시할 때의 제어 모드가 다른 것이다. When the screen is selected, the controller 110 controls the screen display according to the selected screen. In other words, the control mode when displaying one screen is different from the control mode when displaying two screens.
- 실시예 6 - Example 6
도 67내지 70은 도 49와 도 52의 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다. 67-70 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of FIGS. 49-52.
즉, 도 67 은 스프링 장치의 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다. 즉 도면에서처럼 지지판(90) 양 옆에 내부 홈(90a)에 판 스프링 형태의 탄성 지지판(91a)이 구비될 수 있다. That is, FIG. 67 is a view of yet another embodiment of a spring device. That is, the elastic support plate 91a in the form of a plate spring may be provided in the inner groove 90a on both sides of the support plate 90 as shown in the drawing.
도 68은 또 다른 형태의 지지판을 나타낸 도면이다. 도면에서 처럼 지지판(90) 하부에 구비된 내부 바닥(92)이 아래 방향으로 일부 이동이 가능하도록 구비된다. Fig. 68 is a view showing another type of support plate. As shown in the figure, the inner bottom 92 provided below the support plate 90 is provided to allow some movement in the downward direction.
즉, 내부 바닥(92) 하부에 바닥 지지판(93)이 별도로 더 구비되고, 바닥 지지판(93)에 바닥 홈(93a)이 구비된다. 그리고, 상기 홈(93a) 내부에 바닥 스프링(93b)이 만들어 진다. That is, the bottom support plate 93 is further provided below the inner bottom 92, and the bottom groove 93a is provided in the bottom support plate 93. A bottom spring 93b is formed in the groove 93a.
따라서, 내부 바닥이 도 70의 일정 값( ) 만큼 아래로 내려 갈 수가 있게 된다. 이때 값은 1.5mm 를 넘지 않는 것이 좋다. 그러므로 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 완전히 펼쳐져서 디스플레이 높이가 상호 같을 수도 있지만. 1.5mm 정도의 오차를 허용하여 표시장치의 이동 동작에 따른 충격이나 외부 충격으로 부터 안정성을 유지할 수 있게 된다. Therefore, the inner bottom can be lowered down by a predetermined value () of FIG. 70. At this time, the value should not exceed 1.5mm. Therefore, although the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 may be fully extended, the display heights may be the same. By allowing an error of about 1.5mm, it is possible to maintain stability from shocks or external shocks caused by the movement of the display device.
도 69는 또 다른 형태의 결합부를 나타낸 도면으로, 결합부 머리(95a)의 형태가 돌기 형태로 바뀌어져 형성한 것이다. 즉, 결합 돌기(95c) 형성하고, 결합 돌기(95c)가 도 67의 탄성 지지판(91a)과 결합되는 것이다. FIG. 69 is a view showing another embodiment of the coupling part, in which the shape of the coupling head 95a is changed to a protrusion shape. That is, the coupling protrusion 95c is formed, and the coupling protrusion 95c is coupled to the elastic support plate 91a of FIG. 67.
결합 돌기(95c)와 탄성 지지판(91a)의 결합으로 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)의 상하 위치가 효과적으로 고정되게 되는 것이다. 즉, 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 상하 위치에서는 쉽게 고정되고, 중간 단계의 위치에서는 고정되지 않도록 하기 위함이다. The upper and lower positions of the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are effectively fixed by the coupling protrusion 95c and the elastic support plate 91a. In other words, the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are easily fixed in the upper and lower positions, and are not fixed in the intermediate stage positions.
도 70은 상하부 패널하우징의 상하 오차를 나타낸 도면이다. 즉, 도 68에서처럼 바닥 지지판(93)이 구비될 때의 실시예를 나타낸 경우이다. 원칙적으로는 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 펼쳐지면 디스플레이(2)(4)나 패널하우징(20)(40)의 상호 높이가 같게 된다.70 is a diagram illustrating an upper and lower error of the upper and lower panel housings. That is, the embodiment when the bottom support plate 93 is provided as shown in FIG. In principle, when the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are unfolded, the mutual heights of the displays 2 and 4 and the panel housings 20 and 40 are the same.
하지만, 값 만큼 상하 높이에서 차이가 날 수다 있다. 이때 값은 2 mm 혹은 2.5mm 정도를 넘지 않는 것이 좋다. 즉, 상하 패널하우징(20)(40)이 상하 이동 중에서 1.5mm 혹은 2mm 정도 이내 만큼 더 올라가거나 더 내려 간 다음에 높이가 같아진다는 것을 의미한다. However, there can be differences in height above and below the value. At this time, the value should not exceed about 2mm or 2.5mm. That is, it means that the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 go up or down by about 1.5 mm or 2 mm in the vertical movement, and then have the same height.
도 71내지 도 72는 또 다른 실시예의 하부 패널하우징과 돌기판을 나타낸 도면이다. 71 to 72 are views illustrating a lower panel housing and a projection board according to still another embodiment.
본 실시예에서는 하부 패널하우징(20)이 상부 패널하우징(40)을 지지하면서 이동할 때, 견고성을 위해 별도로 판상 모양의 이동 지지대를 더 구비하는 구조를 가지는 것이다. In this embodiment, when the lower panel housing 20 moves while supporting the upper panel housing 40, the lower panel housing 20 has a structure that further includes a plate-shaped moving support separately for rigidity.
즉, 하부 패널하우징(40)에 구비되어 상부 패널하우징(20)을 지지하고 하부 패널하우징(20)을 좌우 방향 혹은 상하 방향으로 이동하는 이동 수단을 구비한 실시예이다. 그리고, 본 발명에서는 상기 이동 수단으로 돌기판(76)을 구비하는 것이다. 또한, 상기 돌기판은 금속 재료로서 강철, 스텐레스 스틸 혹은 합금을 사용하여 견고성을 높인다. In other words, the lower panel housing 40 is provided to support the upper panel housing 20 and move the lower panel housing 20 in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction. In the present invention, the projection means 76 is provided as the moving means. In addition, the protrusion is made of steel, stainless steel or alloy as a metal material to increase the robustness.
도면에서 보면 하부 덮개(43a) 상단에 슬라이딩 수단의 또 다른 실시예인 돌기판(76)이 구비됨을 보인다. 따라서 상기 돌기판(76) 상단에 상부 패널하우징(20)이 장착되며, 상기 돌기판(76)에는 고정 돌기(76a)가 한 개 내지는 두 개 구비될 수 있고 상황에 따라서는 세 개 정도까지는 구비될 수 있다. In the figure it is shown that the projection plate 76, which is another embodiment of the sliding means on the top of the lower cover (43a) is provided. Therefore, the upper panel housing 20 is mounted on the top of the projection board 76, and the projection board 76 may be provided with one or two fixing protrusions 76a, and up to about three depending on the situation. Can be.
도 71에서 돌기판(76)이 바깥 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동된 상태가 도 72이다. 즉, 돌기판(76)이 하부 덮개(43a)의 폭(넓이)보다 더 넓게 만들어지는 구조를 가지게 되는 것이다. In FIG. 71, the protruding plate 76 is slid outwardly in FIG. 72. That is, the projection board 76 has a structure that is made wider than the width (width) of the lower cover (43a).
본발명에서 실질적으로 돌기판(76)이 상부 패널하우징(20)을 지지하며, 따라서 돌기판(76)의 폭을 하부 덮개(43a)의 폭 보다 넓게 해서 상부 패널하우징(20)을 더 견고하게 지지하기 위함이다. In the present invention, the protrusion plate 76 substantially supports the upper panel housing 20, so that the width of the protrusion plate 76 is wider than the width of the lower cover 43a to make the upper panel housing 20 more firm. To support it.
도 73은 돌기판(76)을 나타낸 도면으로 돌기판 하부에 고정 돌기(76b)가 더 구비된다. 상기 고정 돌기(76b)를 통해서 하부 덮개(43a)가 돌기판(76)을 지지하게 된다. 73 is a view showing the projection plate 76, and a fixing projection 76b is further provided below the projection plate. The lower cover 43a supports the protrusion plate 76 through the fixing protrusion 76b.
도 71과 도 73은 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되는 원리의 실시예이며, 상하 방향의 이동은 도 41내지 도 43의 실시예에서 처럼 보호 덮개의 이동에 의해 이루어지게 된다. 71 and 73 are embodiments of a principle in which the panel housing is slidably moved in the left and right directions, and the up and down movement is performed by the movement of the protective cover as in the embodiment of FIGS. 41 to 43.
도 74와 도 75는 돌기판이 슬라이딩 이동되는 원리를 나타낸 도면이다. 74 and 75 are views illustrating a principle in which the protrusion plate is slid.
도면에서 처럼 하부 덮개(43a)에 사각 홈(77)이 구비되고, 상기 사각홈 내부에 도면에서 처럼 판 스프링(77a)이 구비된다. As shown in the figure, a square groove 77 is provided in the lower cover 43a, and a leaf spring 77a is provided in the square groove as shown in the drawing.
도 74는 고정 돌기(76b)가 슬라이딩 이동되는 상태를 나타낸 도면이다. 판 스프링(77a)이 구비되므로서 돌기판(76)이 하부 덮개(43a) 상단에서 슬라이딩 이동 할 때 중간 위치에 있지 않고 처음 위치와 나중 위치에 있도록 하는 것이다.74 is a view illustrating a state in which the fixing protrusion 76b is slidably moved. Since the plate spring (77a) is provided so that the projection plate 76 is in the initial position and the later position, not in the middle position when sliding the top of the lower cover (43a).
도 75는 사각 홈(77)을 상세히 도시한 도면으로, 하부 덮개(43a)에 구비된 사각홈(77) 양 옆에 판스프링(77a)이 구비되고, 그 사이로 돌기판(76)의 고정 돌기(76b)가 슬라이딩 이동되게 된다. 도면에서는 돌기판(76)의 아래 부분을 도시하여 나타낸 그림이다. FIG. 75 is a detailed view of the square groove 77. The leaf springs 77a are provided at both sides of the square groove 77 provided in the lower cover 43a, and the fixing projections of the protrusion 76 are interposed therebetween. 76b is made to slide. In the figure, the lower part of the projection board 76 is shown and shown.
그리고, 도 71에서 도 75까지의 실시예에서 설명된 하부 패널하우징(40)은, 도 41에서 도 52까지 또한 도 67에서 도 70까지 설명된 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)의 실시예에 그대로 적용될 수 있음은 당연하다.In addition, the lower panel housing 40 described in the embodiments of FIGS. 71 to 75 is similar to the embodiment of the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 described in FIGS. 41 to 52 and FIGS. 67 to 70. Naturally, it can be applied as it is.
도 76은 돌기판이 슬라이딩 이동되는 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다. 76 is a view of still another embodiment in which the protrusion plate is slid.
도면에서 도면, 돌기판(76)의 하부에 이동바(78)와 이동축(78a)이 구비된다. 따라서 상기 이동바(78)와 이동축(78a)에 의해 돌기판(76)이 하부덮개(43a) 상부에서 이동하게 된다. In the drawings, a moving bar 78 and a moving shaft 78a are provided below the protrusion plate 76. Therefore, the protrusion plate 76 is moved from the upper portion of the lower cover 43a by the moving bar 78 and the moving shaft 78a.
도 77과 도 78은 이동바에 의한 이동원리를 나타낸 도면이다.77 and 78 are views showing the principle of movement by the moving bar.
도 77은 이동바(78)가 구비된 돌기판(76)을 나타낸 도면이며, 도 78은 돌기판(76)의 이동을 나타낸 도면이다.FIG. 77 is a view showing the projection board 76 with the moving bar 78, and FIG. 78 is a view showing the movement of the projection board 76. As shown in FIG.
도면에서 보면 일단계로 좌우 방향 이동을 나타내고, 이 단계로 상하 방향 이동을 나타낸다. In the drawings, the left and right direction movement is shown in one step, and the up and down direction movement is shown in this step.
좌우 이동은 이동바(78)와 이동축(78a)에 의해 움직이며 이동 스프링(78b)의 탄력에 의해 이동이 가능한 것이다. The left and right movements are moved by the movement bar 78 and the movement shaft 78a and are movable by the elasticity of the movement spring 78b.
그리고 도면에서는 편의상 도시 생략하였지만, 돌기판(76)이 너무 패널하우징(40)의 바깥 방향으로 벗어나지 못하도록 하는 걸림 수단이 있음은 당연하다. 본 실시예에서 적당한 걸림 수단으로서는 도 74와 도 75 실시예가 적용될 수 있다.In addition, although not shown in the drawings for convenience, it is obvious that there is a locking means for preventing the projection board 76 from deviating too far outward of the panel housing 40. 74 and 75 embodiments may be applied as appropriate locking means in this embodiment.
상하 이동도 이동바(78)와 이동축(78a)에 의해 움직이며 이동 스프링(78b)의 탄력에 의해 이동이 가능한 것이다. 여기서 이동축(78a)는 이동바와 이동바(78)를 연결하는 축도 있고, 이동바(78)를 돌기판(76)에 고정하는 축도 있으며, 이동바(78)를 패널하우징(40)에 고정하는 축도 있음은 물론이다.The vertical movement is also moved by the movement bar 78 and the movement shaft 78a and is movable by the elasticity of the movement spring 78b. Here, the moving shaft 78a has an axis connecting the moving bar and the moving bar 78, and there is also an axis for fixing the moving bar 78 to the protruding plate 76, and the moving bar 78 is fixed to the panel housing 40. Of course, there is an axis.
도 79내지 도 81은 상부 패널하우징의 하부를 나타낸 도면이다.79 to 81 are views showing the lower part of the upper panel housing.
도면에서 보면, 상부 패널하우징(20)의 하부에 바닥홈(80)이 구비되고, 상기 바닥홈(80)에 앞쪽과 뒤쪽에 하나씩 고정 스프링(81a)이 더 구비된다. 상기 고정 스프링은 판 스프링 형태가 사용될 수 있음은 물론이다. 상기 고정 스프링(81a)의 작용에 의해서 상부 패널하우징(20)의 위치가 고정되게 된다. In the figure, the bottom groove 80 is provided at the bottom of the upper panel housing 20, the bottom groove 80 is further provided with a fixing spring 81a, one at the front and one at the rear. Of course, the fixed spring may be used in the form of a leaf spring. The position of the upper panel housing 20 is fixed by the action of the fixing spring 81a.
즉, 앞의 실시예 도 41의 상태에 상부 패널하우징(20)이 위치하게 될 때에는 E"에 가까운 고정 스프링이 작용하여 상부 패널하우징(20)을 고정하고, 앞의 실시에 도 42와 43의 상태에서는 이음매부(8)에 가깝게 구비된 고정 스프링이 작용하여 상부 패널하우징(20)을 고정한다.That is, when the upper panel housing 20 is positioned in the state of FIG. 41 of the previous embodiment, a fixing spring close to E " acts to fix the upper panel housing 20, and FIGs. In the state, a fixing spring provided close to the joint 8 acts to fix the upper panel housing 20.
즉, 상부 패널하우징(20)이 하부 패널하우징(40)과 움직일 때 스프링 작용에 의해 원하는 위치에 확실하게 위치하도록 하는 것이다.In other words, when the upper panel housing 20 moves with the lower panel housing 40, the upper panel housing 20 is reliably positioned at a desired position by a spring action.
또한, 돌기판(76) 상단에 고정 돌기(76a)가 두 개 있을 경우에는 두 개의 고정 돌기(76a) 사이에 고정스프링(81a)이 위치하도록 설계하여 견고성을 더 높이게 된다.In addition, when there are two fixing protrusions 76a on the top of the protrusion plate 76, the fixing spring 81a is positioned between the two fixing protrusions 76a to further increase the firmness.
한편, E" 로 표시된 부분은 바닥홈(80)의 끝 부분이라고 할 수 있는데, 상기 바닥홈(80)의 끝 부분(E로 표시된 부분)고정 돌기(76a)를 밀어내는 역할을 할 뿐 아니라, 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40) 그리고 돌기판(76)의 상호 위치를 정하게 되는 역할을 하게 된다. On the other hand, the portion denoted by E "may be referred to as the end of the bottom groove 80, as well as serves to push the end portion (part denoted by E) fixing protrusion 76a of the bottom groove 80, The upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 and the projection plate 76 serves to determine the mutual position.
따라서 각각의 설계 값은 그러한 위치를 반영하여 설계를 하는 것이다. 이 경우는 패널하우징의 크기와 사양에 따라 변하는 값이므로 본 발명에서는 각각의 설계 값을 하나하나 나타낼 필요가 없이 원리만을 나타내는 것이다.Therefore, each design value reflects the design. In this case, since the value varies depending on the size and specification of the panel housing, the present invention does not need to represent each design value one by one, but only represents the principle.
도 80은 도 79에서 E로 표시한 부분을 이동지지판(81b)으로 바꾼 실시예이 도면이다.FIG. 80 is a view showing an embodiment in which the portion indicated by E in FIG. 79 is replaced with the moving support plate 81b.
도면에서처럼, 이동지지판(81b)의 뒤 쪽에 지지 스프링(81c)를 구비하며, 상기 지지 스프링(81c)이 장착되는 지지홈(81d)를 구비한다. 그리고 도 55a에서 처럼 고정 스프링(81a)과 이동 지지판(81b) 사이에 고정 돌기(76a)가 위치하게 되는 것이다.(도면에서 점선으로 표시된 둥근원이 고정 돌기(76a)의 위치를 나타낸 것임.) As shown in the figure, a support spring 81c is provided on the rear side of the movable support plate 81b, and a support groove 81d on which the support spring 81c is mounted. And as shown in Figure 55a, the fixing projection (76a) is located between the fixing spring 81a and the movable support plate (81b).
그러나 이때, 이동지지판(81b)이 화살표 방향으로 밀리게 될 수도 있다. 이것은 두 개의 패널하우징(20)(40) 사이에 밀착되는 정도를 조정할 수 있는 오차 범위를 주어지게 하여 충격 등에 더 견딜 수 있도록 하는 것이다. However, at this time, the moving support plate 81b may be pushed in the direction of the arrow. This is to give an error range that can adjust the degree of close contact between the two panel housings 20, 40, so as to withstand more impact.
즉, 도 81에서 두 개의 패널하우징(20)(40)이 완전히 밀착된 상태가 도 80에서 이동 지지판(81b)이 화살표 방향으로 밀리지 않은 상태가 된다, 그리고, 81에서 두 개의 패널하우징(20)(40) 떨어진 상태가 도 80에서 이동지지판(81b)이 화살표 방향으로 밀려진 상태가 되는 것이다.That is, the state in which the two panel housings 20 and 40 are completely in contact with each other in FIG. 81 becomes a state in which the movable support plate 81b is not pushed in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 80, and the two panel housings 20 in 81. 40, the state in which the moving support plate 81b is pushed in the arrow direction is shown in FIG.
아울러, 두 개의 패널하우징이 최대로 떨어 질 수 있는 정도의 값을 a라고 하면, 상기 a값은 2.5mm 이내가 적당하다. 즉, 상기 a값은 두 개의 패널하우징(20)(40)이 상하 이동 중에 떨어질 수 있는 거리의 범위를 나타낸다. In addition, if the value of the degree that the two panel housings can fall to the maximum, a value, the a value is appropriate within 2.5mm. That is, the value a represents a range of distances between two panel housings 20 and 40 that can fall during vertical movement.
도 82내지 도 84는 측면 돌기판이 구비된 실시예의 도면이다.82 to 84 are views of the embodiment provided with the side protuberances.
도 82는 측면 돌기(79a)가 구비된 측면 돌기판(79)를 나타낸 도면이다. 즉, 하부 패널하우징(40)에서 상부 패널하우징(20)을 지지하기 위한 또 다른 형태의 돌기판이다. FIG. 82 is a view showing a side protrusion 79 provided with side protrusions 79a. That is, another form of protrusion plate for supporting the upper panel housing 20 in the lower panel housing 40.
도면에서 처럼 상부 패널하우징(20)을 지지하는 돌기가 측면에 있게 되며, 따라서 측면 돌기(79a)가 측면 돌기판(79)에 구비된 것이다.As shown in the figure, the protrusions supporting the upper panel housing 20 are on the side, and thus the side protrusions 79a are provided on the side protrusions 79.
도 83은 측면 돌기판(79)의 폭이 하부 덮개(43a)의 폭보다 넓게 형성된 형태를 나타낸 도면이다. 이 경우에는 도면에서는 도시 생략하였지만 도 74내지 도 75의 실시예에서 처럼 고정 돌기(76b)가 측면 돌기판(79) 하부에 구비되게 된다. 그리고 상기 고정 돌기에 의해 측면 돌기판(79)이 하부 덮개(43a) 상단에서 좌우 방향으로 이동하게 된다. FIG. 83 is a view illustrating a form in which the width of the side protrusion board 79 is wider than the width of the lower cover 43a. In this case, although not shown in the drawings, as shown in the embodiment of FIGS. 74 to 75, the fixing protrusion 76b is provided under the side protrusion plate 79. The side protrusion plate 79 is moved from the upper end of the lower cover 43a to the left and right directions by the fixing protrusion.
도 83의 도면에서는 고정 돌기(76b)를 편의상 도시 생략하였고 단지 점선의 도시로 그 위치를 나타내었다.In the drawing of FIG. 83, the fixing protrusion 76b is not shown for convenience and the position thereof is shown by the dotted line.
도 84는 측면 홈을 구비한 상부 패널하우징(20)을 나타낸 도면이다. 측면 돌기(79a)에 맞물리기 위해 상부 패널하우징(20)에 측면홈(86a)를 구비하게 된다.84 is a view showing the upper panel housing 20 having side grooves. In order to engage the side projection (79a) it is provided with a side groove (86a) in the upper panel housing (20).
즉, 도면에서 처럼, 상부 패널하우징(20) 하부에 측면 돌기판이 이동할 수 있는 공간이 되는 하부 공간(85)을 만들고, 상기 하부 공간(85) 양 옆면에 형성된 바닥측면(86)에 측면홈(86a)을 구비하는 것이다.That is, as shown in the drawing, a lower space 85 is formed in the lower side of the upper panel housing 20, which is a space for moving the side protrusion plate, and the side grooves (bottom side 86) formed on both side surfaces of the lower space 85 ( 86a).
이때, 상기 측면홈(86a)에 앞의 실시예에서 처럼 판 스프링 같은 스프링을 더 구비하여, 상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징이 상호 위치하게 되는 위치를 확실하게 할 수 있음은 물론이다. At this time, the side groove (86a) is further provided with a spring, such as a leaf spring, as in the previous embodiment, it is of course possible to ensure the position where the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing are mutually located.
- 실시예 7 - Example 7
도 85는 보호 덮개의 높이를 낮게한 실시예를 나타낸 도면이다.85 is a view showing an embodiment in which the height of the protective cover is lowered.
도면에서 처럼, 보호 덮개(23)(43)의 높이를 낮게 하고, 그 대신 상기 보호 덮개(23)(43)와 맞물리는 부분도 높이를 맞추게 된다. As shown in the figure, the height of the protective covers 23 and 43 is lowered, and instead, the portion engaging with the protective covers 23 and 43 is also adjusted to the height.
도면은 슬라이딩이동 되는 원리를 개념적으로 나타낸 것이며, 상하 패널하우징(20)이 적층 상태에서 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고 다시 상하 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되는 원리를 나타낸 도면이다.The figure conceptually illustrates the principle of sliding movement, and the upper and lower panel housings 20 are slidably moved in the left and right directions in a stacked state, and are slidably moved in the vertical direction again.
두 개의 패널하우징이 적층되었을 때에는 보호 덮개(23)(43)를 덮고 상호 지지하게 되는 구조를 가지는 것이다.When the two panel housings are stacked, the protective covers 23 and 43 are covered and mutually supported.
이렇게 하므로서 보호 덮개(23)(43)의 높이를 낮게하여 디자인적인 모양을 더 좋게 할 수 있으며, 두 개의 패널하우징(20)(40)이 펼쳐졌을 때에는 더 견고하게 상부 패널하우징(20)을 지지할 수 있는 구조를 만들수도 있는 것이다.In this way, the height of the protective cover (23) (43) can be lowered to improve the design, and when the two panel housings (20) and (40) are unfolded, the upper panel housing (20) is more firmly supported. You can also build a structure to do it.
도 86 내지 도 88은 실시예 도 85 실시예에서 돌기판이 움직이는 원리를 나타내는 도면이다.86 to 88 illustrate the principle of movement of the projection board in the embodiment of FIG. 85. FIG.
도면에서 처럼 돌기판(76)은 이동바(78)와 이동축(78a)에 의해 자우 방향과 상하 방향으로 이동하게 된다. As shown in the figure, the projection board 76 is moved in the jaw direction and the vertical direction by the moving bar 78 and the moving shaft 78a.
도 86에서 처럼 이동바(78)가 굽혀져 있는 상태에서, 도 87에서처럼 펼쳐진 상태가 되면 돌기판(76)이 바깥 방향으로 이동하게 된다. 그리고 도 88에서처럼 이동바(78)가 아래로 내려간 상태가 되면 돌기판(76)은 아래로 이동하게 된다. 또한, 이동바(78)의 움직임 조절은 실린더(78b)의 작용에 의한다.As shown in FIG. 86, when the moving bar 78 is bent, as shown in FIG. 87, the protrusions 76 move outward. And when the moving bar 78 is in the down state, as shown in Figure 88, the projection plate 76 is moved downward. In addition, the movement of the movement bar 78 is controlled by the action of the cylinder 78b.
앞의 실시예에서도 설명하였듯이 돌기판(76)의 폭이 보호덮개(43a)혹은 덮개 받침부(43b) 보다 넓게 형성되는 이유는, 돌기판(76)이 상부 패널하우징(20) 보다 더 효과적으로 지지하기 위해서이다. As described in the foregoing embodiment, the width of the protrusion 76 is wider than that of the protective cover 43a or the lid support 43b. The protrusion 76 is supported more effectively than the upper panel housing 20. To do that.
본 발명에서 지금까지 도시된, 돌기판(76), 이동바(78) 및 그에 부속되어 일체화된 부품은 모두 금속의 합금으로 되어 있어 견고성을 강화하게 됨은 당연하다.As shown in the present invention so far, the projection plate 76, the moving bar 78 and the parts integrally attached thereto are all made of an alloy of metal to enhance the robustness.
이상은 하부 패널하우징(20)이 상부 패널하우징(40)을 지지하면서 이동할 때, 견고성을 위해 별도로 판상 모양의 이동 지지대를 더 구비하는 구조를 가지는 것이다. As described above, when the lower panel housing 20 moves while supporting the upper panel housing 40, the lower panel housing 20 further includes a plate-shaped moving support for robustness.
- 실시예 8 - Example 8
도 89내지 도 91은 보호 덮개의 형태를 변경한 실시예의 도면이다.89 to 91 are views of the embodiment in which the shape of the protective cover is changed.
도면에서처럼, 상부 패널하우징(20)에서 양 가장자리를 더 길게하는 구조를 가지게 된다. 그렇게 하므로서, 하부 패널하우징(40)에 구비된 보호 덮개(43)의 길이도 짧아지게 된다.As shown in the figure, the upper panel housing 20 has a structure that makes both edges longer. In doing so, the length of the protective cover 43 provided in the lower panel housing 40 is also shortened.
도면에서 89는 상하부 패널하우징(20)(40)이 적층된 상태를 나타낸 도면으로서, 상부 패널하우징(20)을 화살표 방향으로 이동 시키면 도 90이 된다.In FIG. 89, the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are stacked. When the upper panel housing 20 is moved in the direction of the arrow, the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are stacked.
이때, 도 90에서는 상부 패널하우징(20)의 양 가장자리가 더 길어지는 정도를 나태내었다. 즉, 더 길어지는 정도를 S" 라고 했을 때 상기 S"의 길이는 보호덮개(43) 폭 만큼이 된다. In this case, in FIG. 90, both edges of the upper panel housing 20 are longer. That is, the length of the S "is as much as the width of the protective cover 43 when the degree of lengthening is S".
물론, S" 가 보호 덮개 폭 보다 짧게 형성될 수도 있음은 당연하다. 이 경우에는 그에 맞물리도록 보호 덮개의 모양이 설계 제작 되는 것이다. 다향한 설계 변형은 편의상 도시 생략하였다. Of course, S ″ may be formed shorter than the width of the protective cover. In this case, the shape of the protective cover is designed and manufactured to engage with it. Various design variations are not shown for convenience.
도 90에서 아래 방향으로 이동한 상태가 도 91로 두 개의 패널하우징이 완전히 펼쳐진 상태가 되는 것이다. The state moved downward in FIG. 90 is the state in which the two panel housings are fully unfolded in FIG. 91.
도 92와 도 93은 하부 패널하우징을 나타낸 도면이다.92 and 93 are views illustrating the lower panel housing.
즉, 본 도면은 도 89내지 도 91의 실시예에 부합되는 하부 패널하우징의 구조인 것이다. 즉, 돌기판(76)이 " 자 형태로 형성되어 양 가장자리 방향으로 더 연장된 형태이다. 따라서 고정 돌기(76a)의 위치도 안쪽으로 이동하게 된다.That is, the drawing is a structure of the lower panel housing according to the embodiment of FIGS. 89 to 91. That is, the protrusion plate 76 is formed in a "-shape, and is further extended in both edge directions. Therefore, the position of the fixing protrusion 76a is also moved inward.
한편, 하부 덮개(43a)도 양 가장자리 방향으로 더 연장되어 " 자 형태를 가지게 된다. On the other hand, the lower cover 43a also extends in both edge directions to have a "-shaped shape.
도 89가 92의 상태이고, 여기서 돌기판(76)이 바깥 방향으로 이동하면, 도 90의 상태인 도 93이 된다. 즉 앞의 실시예에서와 마찬가지로 돌기판(76)의 고정 돌기(76a)가 상부 패널하우징(20)을 지지하고 이동하는 것이다. FIG. 89 shows the state of 92, and when the protrusion 76 moves outward, the state of FIG. 90 becomes FIG. That is, as in the previous embodiment, the fixing protrusion 76a of the protrusion plate 76 supports and moves the upper panel housing 20.
- 실시예 9 - Example 9
도 94는 도 46의 바닥판에 스프링 조립체가 결합된 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.FIG. 94 is a view of another embodiment where the spring assembly is coupled to the bottom plate of FIG. 46.
도면에서처럼 바닥판(330)(도 46에서는 부호 81에 해당됨)이 구비되며, 상기 바닥판(330)에는 슬라이딩 돌기(332)와 힌지 구멍(331)이 구비된다. 그리고 플레이트(310)가 더 구비되고, 상기 플레이트(310)는 바닥판(330)과 스프링 조립체(320)를 통해 결합된다. As shown in the figure, a bottom plate 330 (corresponding to reference numeral 81 in FIG. 46) is provided, and the bottom plate 330 is provided with a sliding protrusion 332 and a hinge hole 331. And plate 310 is further provided, the plate 310 is coupled through the bottom plate 330 and the spring assembly 320.
상기 플레이트(310) 양 옆에는 고정홈(311)이 구비되고 상기 고정홈(311)에 가이드 틀(314)이 삽입된다. 상기 가이드 틀(314)에는 가이드 홈(314b)과 가이드 단차(314a)가 구비된다. 그리고 가이드 단차(314a)는 가이드 틀(314)이 고정홈(311)에서 이탈하는 것을 방지한다. Fixing grooves 311 are provided at both sides of the plate 310, and a guide frame 314 is inserted into the fixing grooves 311. The guide frame 314 is provided with a guide groove 314b and a guide step 314a. The guide step 314a prevents the guide frame 314 from being separated from the fixing groove 311.
아울러, 상기 스프링 조립체(320)는 압축과 복원이 가능하도록 만들어진 탄성체이다. 즉 힘을 가하면 압축이 가능하고 가해진 힘이 풀어지면 복원되는 구조이다. 물론 경우에 따라서 팽창과 복원이 가능하도록 하는 구조로 만들 수가 있다. 즉, 힘이 가해지면 팽창되고 가해진 힘이 풀어지면 복원되는 것이다, 그리고 통상의 슬라이딩 휴대폰에 사용되는 다양한 스프링 복합체를 본 발명의 스프링 조립체에 적용하여 사용할 수가 있다. In addition, the spring assembly 320 is an elastic body that can be compressed and restored. In other words, when a force is applied, compression is possible, and when the applied force is released, the structure is restored. In some cases, of course, it can be made into a structure that allows expansion and restoration. That is, it is expanded when the force is applied and restored when the applied force is released, and various spring composites used in the conventional sliding cell phone can be applied to the spring assembly of the present invention.
그리고, 상기 스프링 조립체(320)은 힌지(313a)를 통해 플레이트(310)의 힌지구멍(312)과 결합되고, 또 다른 힌지(313b)를 통해 바닥판(330)의 힌지 구멍(331)과 결합되며, 이때 스프링 조립체(320)의 힌지 걸이(321)가 힌지(313a)(313b)와 결합되는 것이다. In addition, the spring assembly 320 is coupled to the hinge hole 312 of the plate 310 through the hinge 313a, and coupled to the hinge hole 331 of the bottom plate 330 through another hinge 313b. In this case, the hinge hook 321 of the spring assembly 320 is coupled to the hinges (313a) (313b).
한편, 플레이트(310)의 고정홈(311) 내에 삽입된 가이드 틀(314)의 가이드 홈(314b)에 바닥판(330)의 슬라이딩 돌기(332)가 삽입되는 구조를 가진다. Meanwhile, the sliding protrusion 332 of the bottom plate 330 is inserted into the guide groove 314b of the guide frame 314 inserted into the fixing groove 311 of the plate 310.
도 95는 도 94의 슬라이딩 원리를 나타낸 구조도이다. 95 is a structural diagram illustrating a sliding principle of FIG. 94.
도면에서처럼 플레이트(310)가 슬라이딩 플레이트(330)(도 46에서 부호 81에 해당되며 이하 바닥판이라 칭함)양 측면에 슬라이딩되어 움직이게 된다. 이때 스프링 조립체(320)가 중간에 역할을 하게 된다. As shown in the figure, the plate 310 slides on both sides of the sliding plate 330 (corresponding to reference numeral 81 in FIG. 46 and hereinafter referred to as a bottom plate). At this time, the spring assembly 320 serves in the middle.
도 95의 좌측에 도시된 상태는 스프링 조립체(320)가 압축된 상태를 나타낸 도면이고, 우측에 도시된 상태는 팽창된 상태(복원된 상태) 이다. 즉 압력이 가해지면 이동하면서 스프링 조립체(320)는 압축되면서, 플레이트(310)가 바닥판(330)의 한쪽 끝 부분에 위치하게 된다. 그리고, 압력이 풀리면 스프링 조립체(320)가 팽창되어 플레이트(310)가 바닥판(330)의 다른 쪽 끝 부분에 위치하게 된다.The state shown on the left side of FIG. 95 is a view showing a state in which the spring assembly 320 is compressed, and the state shown on the right side is an expanded state (restored state). That is, the spring assembly 320 is compressed while the pressure is applied, and the plate 310 is positioned at one end of the bottom plate 330. Then, when the pressure is released, the spring assembly 320 is expanded so that the plate 310 is located at the other end of the bottom plate 330.
도 96은 플레이트와 받침판을 나타낸 도면이다. 96 is a view showing a plate and a support plate.
도면의 받침판(300)은 도 41, 도 82, 도 83 및 도 89 등에 도시된 받침부(43a) 상단에 위치하게 된다.  The supporting plate 300 of the drawing is positioned on the upper portion of the supporting portion 43a shown in FIGS. 41, 82, 83, 89, and the like.
그리고 상기 받침판(300)은 플레이트(310)와 또 다른 형태의 스프링 조립체(325)를 통해 결합되고 상호 슬라이딩 이동되며, 슬라이딩 이동되는 원리는 도94 및 도 95와 비슷하다. 따라서, 도면에서처럼 스프링 조립체(325)는 힌지(305a)(305b)와 각각의 힌지구멍(304)(316)을 통해 플레이트(310)와 받침판(300)에 결합된다. 이때 힌지 걸이(326)가 역할을 하게 된다.In addition, the support plate 300 is coupled to each other through the plate 310 and the spring assembly 325 of another type, and the mutual sliding movement, the principle of sliding movement is similar to FIGS. 94 and 95. Accordingly, as shown in the drawing, the spring assembly 325 is coupled to the plate 310 and the support plate 300 through the hinges 305a and 305b and the respective hinge holes 304 and 316. At this time, the hinge hook 326 serves.
또한, 플레이트(310) 양 측면에 도면에서처럼 슬라이딩 지지대(315) 와 홈 지지대(317)을 구비한다, 슬라이딩 지지대(315) 상부에는 돌기부(315a)가 형성된다. 홈 지지대(317) 안쪽에는 가이드 틀(306)이 장착되며 상기 가이드 틀(306)에는 돌출부(306a)와 가이드 홈(306b)이 구비된다.In addition, the sliding plate 315 and the groove support 317 is provided on both sides of the plate 310, as shown in the figure, the projection 315a is formed on the sliding support 315. The guide frame 306 is mounted inside the groove support 317, and the guide frame 306 is provided with a protrusion 306a and a guide groove 306b.
그리고, 받침판(300)의 한쪽에는 고정홈(301)이 구비되고, 상기 고정홈(301)에 가이드 틀(302)이 장착된다. 당연히 상기 가이드 틀(302)에는 가이드 홈(302b)과 돌출부(302a)가 구비된다. 이때 상기 돌출부(302a)는 가이드 틀(302)이 고정홈(301)을 벗어나지 않도록 하는 역할을 한다.In addition, a fixing groove 301 is provided at one side of the support plate 300, and a guide frame 302 is mounted to the fixing groove 301. Naturally, the guide frame 302 is provided with a guide groove 302b and a protrusion 302a. At this time, the protrusion 302a serves to prevent the guide frame 302 from leaving the fixing groove 301.
한편, 받침판(300)의 또 다른 한쪽에는 슬라이딩 돌기부(303)가 구비된다. 이때 돌기부(303)는 굴절부(303a)를 통해 굽혀져 있다.On the other hand, the other side of the support plate 300 is provided with a sliding projection 303. At this time, the protrusion 303 is bent through the refracting portion 303a.
따라서, 플레이트(310)의 돌기부(315a)는 받침판(300)의 가이드 홈(302b)에 삽입되어 슬라이딩되고, 받침판(300)의 돌기부(303)는 플레이트(310)의 가이드 홈(306b)에 삽입되어 슬라이딩 된다.Accordingly, the protrusion 315a of the plate 310 is inserted into the guide groove 302b of the base plate 300 and slides, and the protrusion 303 of the base plate 300 is inserted into the guide groove 306b of the plate 310. Become sliding.
도 97은 도 96의 슬라이딩 원리를 나타낸 도면이다. 97 is a view illustrating the sliding principle of FIG. 96.
도면에서처럼 받침판(300)이 플레이트(310)에 슬라이딩되어 움직이게 된다. 이때 스프링 조립체(325)가 중간에 역할을 하게 된다. As shown in the drawing, the support plate 300 slides on the plate 310 to move. At this time, the spring assembly 325 plays a role in the middle.
도 97의 좌측에 도시된 상태는 스프링 조립체(325)가 압축된 상태를 나타낸 도면이고, 우측에 도시된 상태는 복원된 상태(스프링에 가해진 힘이 제거 되었을 때의 상태)를 나타낸 도면이다. 즉 압력이 가해지면 이동하면서 스프링 조립체(325)는 압축되고, 받침판(300)이 플레이트(310) 한쪽 끝 부분에 위치하게 된다. 그리고, 압력이 풀리면 스프링 조립체(325)가 팽창(복원)되어 받침판(300)이 플레이트(310) 다른 쪽 끝 부분에 위치하게 된다.97 is a view showing a state in which the spring assembly 325 is compressed, the state shown on the right is a view showing a restored state (state when the force applied to the spring is removed). That is, when pressure is applied, the spring assembly 325 is compressed while the support plate 300 is positioned at one end of the plate 310. When the pressure is released, the spring assembly 325 is expanded (restored) so that the support plate 300 is positioned at the other end of the plate 310.
도 98은 받침판에 구비된 측면판을 나타낸 도면이다. 98 is a view showing a side plate provided on the base plate.
도면에서처럼 받침판(300)의 한쪽 측면에 측면판(307)이 구비되며, 상기 측면판(307)에는 스프링 돌기(307b) 돌기와 삽입구(307a)가 구비된다. 도면에서 볼 때는 측면판(307)의 안쪽에 구비되지만 별도의 확대도를 통해 스프링 돌기(307b)와 삽입구(307a)를 도시하였다. 그리고 측면판(307)에 점선의 원으로 스프링 돌기(307b)와 삽입구(307a)의 위치를 나타내었다.  As shown in the figure, a side plate 307 is provided on one side of the support plate 300, and the side plate 307 is provided with a spring protrusion 307b protrusion and an insertion hole 307a. In the drawings, the spring protrusion 307b and the insertion hole 307a are shown in the inner side of the side plate 307 but through a separate enlarged view. And the position of the spring protrusion 307b and the insertion hole 307a by the dotted line in the side plate 307 is shown.
상기 스프링 돌기(307b)는 힌지나 나사 못 같은 수단에 의해 측면판(307)과 결합된다. 그리고 상기 스프링 돌기(307b)와 삽입구(307a)를 감싸는 곡면 하우징(308)이 더 구비되며, 상기 곡면 하우징(308)은 결합판(308a)에 의해 측면판(307)과 결합된다, 이때, 상기 결합판(308a)는 나사나 힌지 못과 같은 결합부(308b)를 통해 결합된다. The spring protrusion 307b is coupled to the side plate 307 by means such as a hinge or a screw nail. Further, a curved housing 308 surrounding the spring protrusion 307b and the insertion hole 307a is further provided, and the curved housing 308 is coupled to the side plate 307 by a coupling plate 308a. The coupling plate 308a is coupled through a coupling portion 308b such as a screw or a hinge nail.
또한 상기 스프링 돌기(307b)는 곡면 형상을 가지며 스프링과 같이 탄성력을 가지는 금속체나 플라스틱 등으로 제조되며, 가해지는 힘이나 압력에 의해 약간의 모양 변화도 가능하다. In addition, the spring protrusion 307b has a curved shape and is made of a metal body or plastic having elasticity, such as a spring, and may be slightly changed in shape by an applied force or pressure.
도 99는 하부 패널하우징의 결합 돌기를 나타낸 도면이다.  99 is a view showing the engaging projection of the lower panel housing.
도면에서처럼 하부 패널하우징(40)의 측면부에 결합돌기(97)와 돌기 머리(97a)가 구비되며, 상기 결합돌기(97)가 측면판(307)의 삽입구(307a)와 삽입되며, 상기 돌기 머리(97a)는 스프링 돌기(307b)와 곡면 하우징(308) 사이에 위치하게 된다.  As shown in the figure, a coupling protrusion 97 and a protrusion head 97a are provided at a side surface of the lower panel housing 40, and the coupling protrusion 97 is inserted into the insertion hole 307a of the side plate 307. 97a is positioned between the spring protrusion 307b and the curved housing 308.
도 100은 돌기 머리에 의해 패널하우징이 움직이는 원리도이다.100 is a principle diagram in which the panel housing moves by the projection head.
본 발명에서 스프링 돌기(307b)는 도면에서처럼 곡면 형상을 가졌지만, 탄성력을 가지는 금속이나 프라스틱 재질로 되어 있다. 그리고, 상기 스프링 돌기(307b)와 곡면 하우징(308) 사이에 돌기 머리(97a)가 위치하여, 상기 돌기 머리(97a)는 곡면 형상을 따라 상하 이동을 하게 된다. 즉, 곡면 하우징(308). 스프링 돌기(307b), 측면판(307) 및 받침부(43a)가 모두 아래오 이동하게 되지만, 돌기머리(97a)와 하부 패널하우징(40) 측면부는 상대적으로 아래로 이동하지 않게 된다는 것이다. In the present invention, the spring protrusion 307b has a curved shape as shown in the drawing, but is made of a metal or plastic material having elasticity. In addition, the projection head 97a is positioned between the spring protrusion 307b and the curved housing 308 so that the protrusion head 97a moves up and down along the curved shape. That is, curved housing 308. The spring protrusion 307b, the side plate 307, and the supporting portion 43a all move downward, but the protrusion head 97a and the lower panel housing 40 do not move relatively downward.
그리고, 상기 돌기 머리(97a)의 이동에 의해 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널 하우징(40)이 곡선으로 상하 이동을 하게 된다. In addition, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 move upward and downward in a curve by the movement of the projection head 97a.
도면에서는 돌기 머리(97a)가 화살표 방향으로 이동함을 나타낸 것이고, 당연히 다시 화살표 반대 방향으로 이동도 하게 된다. In the figure, the protruding head 97a moves in the direction of the arrow, and of course, moves again in the direction opposite to the arrow.
한편, 결합 돌기(97)은 하부 패널하우징(40)의 측벽 안쪽에도 형성되며 도면에서처럼 스프링 장치(97b)가 감싸고 있다. 턱(97c)도 구비되어 결합돌기(97)가 하부 패널하우징(40)의 측벽을 벗어나는 것을 방지하게 된다. On the other hand, the coupling protrusion 97 is also formed inside the side wall of the lower panel housing 40, the spring device 97b is wrapped as shown in the figure. A jaw 97c is also provided to prevent the engaging projection 97 from escaping the side wall of the lower panel housing 40.
그리고, 상기 스프링 장치(97b) 때문에 돌기 머리(97a)가 곡면 형상의 스프링 돌기(307b) 표면을 이동할 수 있게 된다. 즉, 상기 결합 돌기(97)가 하부 패널하우징(40) 측벽을 중심으로 좌우로 이동 가능하게 된다.And, because of the spring device (97b) the projection head (97a) is able to move the surface of the spring projection (307b) of the curved shape. That is, the coupling protrusion 97 may move left and right about the side wall of the lower panel housing 40.
도 101내지 도 103은 상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징이 좌 우방향과 상하 방향으로 이동하는 원리를 나타낸 도면이다.101 to 103 are views illustrating a principle in which the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing move in the left, right, and up and down directions.
바닥판(330)은 상부 패널하우징(20) 하부에 결합되고, 바닥판(330)의 슬라이딩 돌기(332)가 플레이트(310)의 가이드 홈(314b)에 삽입될 수 있도록 슬라이딩 홈(80)이 구비된다. 도 101 에서는 홈이 편의상 도시 생략되었지만, 본 발명 도 46의 홈(80)을 참조하면 된다.  The bottom plate 330 is coupled to the lower portion of the upper panel housing 20, and the sliding groove 80 is inserted to allow the sliding protrusion 332 of the bottom plate 330 to be inserted into the guide groove 314b of the plate 310. It is provided. Although the groove is omitted in FIG. 101 for convenience, the groove 80 of FIG. 46 of the present invention may be referred to.
그리고, 상기 바닥판(330) 하부에 플레이트(310)가 구비되며, 당연히 상기 바닥판(330)과 플레이트(310) 사이에는 스프링 조립체(320)가 구비된다. 또한, 상기 플레이트(310) 하부에는 받침판(300)가 구비되며, 마찬가지로 상기 플레이트(310)와 받침판(300) 사이에는 또 다른 스프링 조립체(325)가 구비된다. In addition, a plate 310 is provided below the bottom plate 330, and a spring assembly 320 is provided between the bottom plate 330 and the plate 310. In addition, the support plate 300 is provided below the plate 310, and similarly, another spring assembly 325 is provided between the plate 310 and the support plate 300.
이때 상기 받침판(300)은 하부 패널하우징(40)의 받침부(43a) 상단에 견고히 고정하여 구비된다. 물론 본 발명의 도면에서는 생략되었지만, 상기 받침판(300)이 받침부(43a)와 결합될 때, 나사 못이나, 힌지 및 홈과 돌기 등을 사용한 다양한 결합 형태로 결합 될 수 있음은 당연하다.At this time, the support plate 300 is provided to be firmly fixed to the top of the support portion (43a) of the lower panel housing (40). Of course, although omitted in the drawings of the present invention, when the base plate 300 is coupled with the base 43 (a), it is natural that it can be combined in various coupling forms using screws, hinges, grooves and protrusions.
그리고, 도 101에서 처럼 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)이 겹쳐져 완전히 닫혀진 상태에서는 스프링 조립체(320)(325)가 팽창(복원)되어 존재하게 된다. 즉 도 95와 도 97에서 설명된 것 처럼 스프링 조립체(320)(325)가 팽창된 상태와 같게 된다.In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, in the state where the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 overlap and are completely closed, the spring assemblies 320 and 325 are expanded (restored) and exist. That is, as described in FIGS. 95 and 97, the spring assemblies 320 and 325 are in an expanded state.
그리고 도 102에서처럼 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)을 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동하게 되면, 도 94과 도 96의 설명에 설명된 원리에 의해 각각 슬라이딩 이동하게 된다. 즉 바닥판(300)과 플레이트(310)과 슬라이딩 이동하고, 받침판(300)과 플레이트(310)가 슬라이딩 이동한다. 그리고 각각의 스프링 조립체(320)(325)는 도 95와 도 97에서 설명된 것처럼 압축된 상태가 된다.  When the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 are slidably moved in the left and right directions as illustrated in FIG. 102, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 are slidably moved according to the principles described in the description of FIGS. 94 and 96. That is, the bottom plate 300 and the plate 310 slides and moves, and the support plate 300 and the plate 310 slide. Each spring assembly 320 and 325 is then compressed, as described in FIGS. 95 and 97.
좌우 방향의 슬라이딩 이동은 바닥홈(80)을 통해 고정홈(311)이 이동하여 가능하게 되는 것이다. The sliding movement in the left and right directions is made possible by moving the fixing groove 311 through the bottom groove (80).
한편, 상부 패널하우징(20)을 최대한 밀어서 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동하게 되면 결국 상부 패널하우징(20)은 상하 방향으로 이동하게 되어 도 103의 상태가 된다. 이렇게 이동하게 되는 이유는 도 100에서 처럼 돌기 머리(97a)가 스프링 돌기(307b)와 곡면 하우징(308) 사이에서 이동하기 때문이다.  Meanwhile, when the upper panel housing 20 is slid to the left and right directions as far as possible, the upper panel housing 20 is moved in the vertical direction, thereby bringing the state of FIG. 103. This movement is because the projection head 97a moves between the spring projection 307b and the curved housing 308 as in FIG.
즉, 힘을 가하면 그 다음에는 스프링 돌기(307b)의 힘에 의해 상부 패널하우징(20)이 아래 방향으로 이동하여 하부 패널하우징(40)과 밀착된 상태가 되며, 그 결과 두 개의 디스플레이(2)(4)는 도 33처럼 상호 인접되게 된다. That is, when a force is applied, the upper panel housing 20 is moved downward by the force of the spring protrusion 307b, so that the upper panel housing 20 is in close contact with the lower panel housing 40. As a result, the two displays 2 (4) becomes adjacent to each other as shown in FIG.
도 104는 바닥판의 단면 모양을 나타낸 도면이다.104 is a view showing the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate.
도면에서처럼 바닥판(330)은 상부 패널하우징(20)의 아래 부분과 연결되어 상부 패널하우징(20) 아래에 직접 장착된다. 따라서 바닥판(330)은 금속 등의 재질로 튼튼하게 만들어 진다. 그리고 바닥판(330) 양 끝에 슬라이딩 돌기(332)가 형성되고, 상기 슬라이딩 돌기(332)와 플레이트(310)의 고정홈(311)이 삽입 결합되어 이동 가능하도록 바닥 홈(80)이 만들어 진다. As shown in the figure, the bottom plate 330 is connected to the lower portion of the upper panel housing 20 and mounted directly under the upper panel housing 20. Therefore, the bottom plate 330 is made of a material such as metal. In addition, sliding protrusions 332 are formed at both ends of the bottom plate 330, and the bottom grooves 80 are formed to be movable by inserting and coupling the sliding protrusions 332 and the fixing grooves 311 of the plate 310.
도 105와 도 106은 스프링 돌기를 통해 패널하우징이 움직이는 경로의 원리를 나타낸 도면이다. 105 and 106 are views showing the principle of the path that the panel housing moves through the spring projection.
도 105의 경우 오른쪽 측면에 도시된 곡선 모양(화살표 포시)의 반대 방향으로 상부 패널하우징(20)이 하부 패널하우징(40)에 대하여 상하 이동을 하게 된다. 즉, 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)이 상하 이동을 할 때 직선 운동이 아닌 곡선 운동을 하며, 결과적으로 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)이 상하 이동중에 상호 거리가 이격되었다가 다시 밀착되게 되는 것이다. In the case of FIG. 105, the upper panel housing 20 moves up and down with respect to the lower panel housing 40 in a direction opposite to the curved shape (arrow posh) shown on the right side. That is, when the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 move up and down, the linear panel moves in a curved motion rather than linearly. As a result, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 mutually move up and down. The distance will be close and then close again.
이때 이격되는 거리는 너무 크면 좋지 않으며 통상 0.5mm 가 적당하지만 1mm에서 3mm까지 할 수도 있다. 그리고 이러한 이격 거리는 스프링 돌기(307b)의 좌우 폭의 크기에 의해 결정되게 된다. At this time, the distance to be separated is not good too large and usually 0.5mm is suitable, but may be from 1mm to 3mm. And this separation distance is determined by the size of the left and right width of the spring projection (307b).
도 106의 경우는 돌출된 곡면 형상을 가지는 스프링 돌기(307b)를 나타내며, 따라서 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)도 이와 같은 모양의 반대로 이동하게 된다.106 illustrates a spring protrusion 307b having a protruding curved shape, and thus the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 also move in the opposite direction.
즉, 상부 패널하우징(20)이 하부 패널하우징(40) 아래로 이동할 때, 상부 패널하우징(20)이 하부 패널하우징(40)보다 약간 높은 위치에 있다가 아래 방향으로 이동하는 것이다. 그런 다음에 결과적으로 상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징이 높이가 같아진 상태로 밀착하게 된다. That is, when the upper panel housing 20 moves below the lower panel housing 40, the upper panel housing 20 is positioned slightly higher than the lower panel housing 40 and then moves downward. Then, as a result, the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing come into close contact with each other at the same height.
이때 높은 위치로 이격되는 거리는 통상 0.5mm 정도면 충분하지만 3mm 이내이면 적당할 수 있다.In this case, the distance from the high position is usually about 0.5mm is enough, but within 3mm may be appropriate.
반대로, 하부 패널하우징(20)이 원래 위치로 되돌아 올 때에는 반대 경로를 따라 이동한다.Conversely, when the lower panel housing 20 returns to its original position, it moves along the opposite path.
한편, 도면에서처럼 돌출부(307d)는 별도 스프링 장치를 부가하여 쉽게 수축이 되는 설계 구조로 가지고 갈 수 있음은 당연하다. On the other hand, as shown in the drawing, the protrusion 307d can be taken as a design structure that is easily contracted by adding a separate spring device.
도 107은 상하부 패널하우징의 움직임을 나타낸 도면이다. 107 is a view showing the movement of the upper and lower panel housings.
도면에서처럼, 상하 패널하우징(20)(40)이 좌우 방향으로 슬라이동 이동(도면에서 (A) 상태)되어, 상하 방향 이동하기 전 상태(도면에서 (B)상태)가 된다. 이러한 이동은 압력을 가하여 스프링 조립체(320)(325)가 압축되는 과정에서 일어나게 된다.As shown in the figure, the upper and lower panel housings 20 and 40 are slidably moved in the left and right directions ((A) state in the drawing), and are in a state before moving in the vertical direction (B) state in the drawing. This movement takes place in the process of compressing the spring assembly 320, 325 by applying pressure.
그리고, 더 이동 압력을 가하면 상부 패널하우징(20)이 하부 패널하우징(40) 보다 약간 위로 올라가게 된다.(도면에서 (C) 상태) 이때 약간 위로 이격되는 거리는 0.05 mm 로 매우 작을 수도 있지만 0.5에서 3mm 정도가 적당하며, 상기 거리는 도 106에서 돌출부(307d)의 크기로 정해진다. Further, applying a further moving pressure causes the upper panel housing 20 to rise slightly above the lower panel housing 40 ((C) state in the drawing). About 3 mm is suitable, and the distance is determined by the size of the projection 307d in FIG.
상부 패널하우징(20)이 약간 위로 올라간 다음 아래 방향으로 이동(도면에서 (D) 상태)하게 되는데, 이때에도 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)은 약간 이격 된 상태에서 이동한다. 이때에도 적당한 이격 거리는 있게 되며 0.05 mm 로 매우 작을 수도 있지만 0.5에서 3mm 정도가 적당하다. The upper panel housing 20 is slightly raised and then moved downwards ((D) state in the drawing). In this case, the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 move in a slightly spaced state. At this time, there is a suitable separation distance and may be very small as 0.05 mm, but 0.5 to 3 mm is suitable.
또한, 위의 과정을 거치면 디스플레이가 상호 인접되는 상태(도면에서 (E) 상태)가 되게 된다. 그리고 이 과정을 압력을 가해 다시 되돌릴 수도 있게 된다.In addition, through the above process, the display is in a state of being adjacent to each other ((E) state in the drawing). This process can also be pressurized and reversed.
이러한 상황을 도면에서 비교해 보면, 도 105와 도 106에서 돌기 머리(97a)가 아래에 위치한 상태(도 35와 도 36에서는 아래에 위치한 돌기 머리를 실선으로 도시함)가 도 107에서는 (B) 상태이고, 돌기머리(97a)가 위쪽에 위치한 상태(도 35와 36에서는 위쪽에 위치한 돌기머리를 일점 쇄선으로 도시)가 도 107에서는 (E) 상태가 된다. 그리고 이러한 과정은 압력이 가해지고 풀어짐에 따라 반복될 수 있다.Comparing such a situation in the drawing, the state where the projection head 97a is located below in FIGS. 105 and 106 (the projection head located below in solid lines in FIGS. 35 and 36 is shown in solid lines) is the state (B) in FIG. The state where the projection head 97a is located upward (shown by the dashed-dotted line in the upper part in FIGS. 35 and 36) is the state (E) in FIG. 107. And this process can be repeated as pressure is applied and released.
도 108내지 도 111은 스프링 조립체에 대한 실시예를 나타낸 도면이다. 108-111 illustrate an embodiment of a spring assembly.
본 발명에서는 힘을 가하면 압축이 가능하고 힘을 풀게 되면 다시 복원되거나, 또는 힘을 가하면 팽창되고 힘이 풀어지면 복원되는 통상의 스프링 복합체를 사용하게 되고 그러한 예를 나타낸 도면으로, 본 실시예 이외에 압축과 복원 혹은 팽창과 복원이 가능한 다양한 스프링 복합체의 사용이 가능함은 당연하다.In the present invention, it is possible to compress by applying a force and to restore again when the force is released, or to use a conventional spring composite that is expanded and restored when the force is released. Naturally, it is possible to use a variety of spring composites that are capable of overstressing or restoring or expanding and restoring.
도 108 코일 스프링(320a)으로 결합 연결된 두 개의 슬라이딩 바(320b)(320c)가 슬라이딩 수단(320d)에 의해 상호 슬라이딩 되며, 이때 코일 스프링(320a)에 의해 두 개의 슬라이딩 바(320b)(320c)는 상호 압축과 팽창이 가능하게 된다. 당연히 슬라이딩 바(320b)(320c)의 한쪽은 바닥판(330)에 다른 한쪽은 플레이트(310)에 결합 연결되는 것이다. 108 The two sliding bars 320b and 320c coupled to the coil spring 320a are mutually slid by the sliding means 320d, at which time the two sliding bars 320b and 320c are moved by the coil spring 320a. Can be mutually compressed and expanded. Naturally, one of the sliding bars 320b and 320c is coupled to the bottom plate 330 and the other to the plate 310.
도 109는 경사바(327a)와 압축 스프링(327)을 이용하여 플레이트(310)가 이동이 가능하도록 하는 원리이다. 즉, 플레이트(310)에 압력을 가해 위로 밀면 경사바(327a)에 의해 압축 스프링(327)이 압축이 되게 되며, 압력을 풀면 압축 스프링(327)이 팽창되어 플레이트(310) 슬라이딩 홈 내지는 슬라이딩 바(335)를 통해 원래 위치로 복원되게 된다. 109 is a principle that allows the plate 310 to move using the inclined bar 327a and the compression spring 327. That is, when the pressure is applied to the plate 310 and pushed upward, the compression spring 327 is compressed by the inclined bar 327a. When the pressure is released, the compression spring 327 is expanded to expand the plate 310 by the sliding groove or the sliding bar. Through 335 is restored to the original position.
도 110과 도 111은 반원 모양을 가지는 철사 형태의 스프링을 다수개 연결하여 압축과 팽창이 가능하도록 한 스프링 조립체이다. 즉, 반원 모양의 다수개의 철사 스프링(329b)을 회전 힌지(329c)로 연결하여 회전 가능한 관절을 만든 다음, 양 끝에 고정부(329a)(329d)를 두게 된다. 110 and 111 is a spring assembly to enable compression and expansion by connecting a plurality of springs in the form of a semi-circular wire. That is, a plurality of semicircular wire springs 329b are connected to each other by a rotation hinge 329c to form a rotatable joint, and then, the fixing parts 329a and 329d are placed at both ends.
물론 고정부(329a)(329d) 중에서 하나는 플레이트(310) 다른 하나는 바닥판(330)에 고정하게 된다. 그리고, 플레이트(310)와 바닥판(330)의 움직임에 힘을 가하여 슬라이딩 이동하면 철사 스프링(329b)이 압축되고, 힘을 풀어주면 철사 스프링(329c)이 팽창되어 플레이트(310)와 바닥판(330)의 위치가 복원되는 것이다.Of course, one of the fixing parts 329a and 329d is fixed to the plate 310 and the other to the bottom plate 330. In addition, when the sliding movement is applied to the movement of the plate 310 and the bottom plate 330, the wire spring 329b is compressed, and when the force is released, the wire spring 329c is expanded to expand the plate 310 and the bottom plate ( The position of 330 is to be restored.
한편, 반원 모양의 스프링 구조의 또 다른 실시예인 도 111은 두개의 패널하우징이 이동 거리가 클 때 사용되는 스프링 구조의 한 예이다. Meanwhile, FIG. 111, which is another embodiment of a semicircular spring structure, is an example of a spring structure used when two panel housings have a large moving distance.
- 실시예 10 - Example 10
도 112에서 도 118은 슬라이딩 구조의 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.112 through 118 are diagrams of yet another embodiment of the sliding structure.
이 중에서, 도 112 내지 도 115는 스라이딩 이동 원리를 나타낸 도면이다. 플레이트(310)와 연결된 스프링 복합체(320)가 상부 패널하우징(20)의 바닥판(상부 패널하우징의 바닥판과 연결되는 과정은 도시 생략되었고 도 94에서 도 103까지의 실시예의 원리가 적용될 수 있다.)과 연결되어, 상부 패널하우징(20)과 하부 패널하우징(40)이 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동하도록 한다. 112 to 115 are views illustrating the sliding movement principle. The process in which the spring composite 320 connected to the plate 310 is connected to the bottom plate of the upper panel housing 20 (the bottom plate of the upper panel housing is omitted) and the principles of the embodiments of FIGS. 94 to 103 may be applied. .) To allow the upper panel housing 20 and the lower panel housing 40 to slide in the left and right directions.
이때, 스프링 복합체는 팽창에서 복원 혹은 수축에서 복원을 반복하며, 스프링등의 부속품으로 만들어져 탄성력으로 슬라이딩 이동하게 하는 힘들 갖는다.At this time, the spring complex repeats the restoration in expansion or contraction in expansion, it is made of accessories such as spring and has the force to make the sliding movement by elastic force.
또한 받침 플레이트(340)가 더 구비되고, 받침 플레이트(340)와 플레이트(310)는 일체의 부품으로 되어 같이 움직일 수 있다. 상기 받침 플레이트(340) 모양은 앞의 실시예 도 92와 도 93에서 도시된 돌기판(76)의 기능이 응용되어 변형된 것으로 보면 된다. In addition, the support plate 340 is further provided, the support plate 340 and the plate 310 may be moved together as an integral part. The shape of the support plate 340 may be deformed by applying the function of the protrusion plate 76 illustrated in FIGS. 92 and 93.
받침 플레이트(340)은 하부 패널하우징(40) 내부에 장착되며, 하부 패널하우징으로부터 슬라이동 이동하여 일부가 밖에도 나올 수 있는 구조가 된다. 이때 받침 플레이트(340)가 하부 패널하우징(40) 내부에서 밖으로 슬라이딩 이동하는 원리도 상기의 플레이트(310)와 스프링 복합체(320)가 이동하는 원리를 적용할 수 있고, 혹은 통상의 가이드 구조와 스프링 장치를 이용할 수 있다. The backing plate 340 is mounted inside the lower panel housing 40 and moves to slide from the lower panel housing so that a part of the support plate 340 may come out. At this time, the principle that the support plate 340 sliding out of the lower panel housing 40 can also be applied to the principle that the plate 310 and the spring composite 320 is moved, or a conventional guide structure and spring The device can be used.
다만, 본 실시예에서 받침 플레이트(340)가 작동하는 원리를 별도로 설명하지 않은 것은 앞의 실시예를 통해서 그 원리를 적용할 수 있기 때문이다. However, the principle of the operation of the support plate 340 in this embodiment is not described separately because the principle can be applied through the previous embodiment.
이때, 받침 플레이트(340)가 하부 패널하우징으로부터 일부가 밖으로 나올 경우, 받침 플레이트를(340) 지지할 수 있는 구조를 만들 수 있으며, 이러한 구조는 앞의 실시예 도 85에서 도 88의 하부 패널하우징 구조가 적용될 수도 있다. At this time, when the supporting plate 340 is partially out of the lower panel housing, it can make a structure that can support the supporting plate 340, this structure is the lower panel housing of Figure 85 to Figure 88 in the above embodiment The structure may be applied.
표시장치의 사용자가 상호 겹쳐진 상하부 패널하우징(도 112)에서 상부 패널하우징(20)을 밀면 플레이트(310)가 이동하므로서, 스프링 복합체(320)가 압축 혹은 팽창되고 상하부 패널하우징은 좌우 방향으로 펼쳐지게 된다.(도 113)When the user of the display device pushes the upper panel housing 20 in the overlapping upper and lower panel housings (FIG. 112), the spring 310 is compressed or expanded and the upper and lower panel housings are expanded in the left and right directions. (Figure 113)
그리고, 더 밀게 되면 받침 플레이트(340)가 밖으로 나오게 되며 따라서 받침 플레이트와 연결된 플레이트(310)도 하부 패널하우징 경계 밖으로 나오게 된다.(도 114), 여기서 받침 플레이트(340)가 패널하우징 밖으로 나오는 경우도 받침 플레이트에 장착된 스프링이 압축 혹은 팽창 상태가 되게 된다.Further, when pushed further, the support plate 340 comes out, and thus, the plate 310 connected to the support plate also comes out of the lower panel housing boundary (FIG. 114), where the support plate 340 also comes out of the panel housing. The spring mounted on the backing plate is compressed or expanded.
그 다음에 사용자는 상부 패널하우징을 아래 방향으로 밀면 상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징은 서로 높이가 같아진 상태가 된다.(도 115) 이를 위해서 받침 플레트(340)가 하부 패널하우징(40) 안에서 아래 방향으로 이동하고, 따라서 플레이트(310)도 아래 방향으로 이동하고, 그러므로 플레이트(310)가 지지하고 있는 상부 패널하우징(20)도 아래로 내려오게 된다. Then, when the user pushes the upper panel housing downward, the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing are in the same state as each other (FIG. 115). For this purpose, the support plate 340 is in the lower panel housing 40. The plate 310 moves downward, so that the plate 310 also moves downward, so that the upper panel housing 20 supported by the plate 310 also descends.
이때 받침 플레이트(340)가 아래로 이동하는 원리는 스프링의 압측 혹은 팽창 그리고 이동 가이드 부품 등을 사용하여 구현할 수 있다.At this time, the principle of the support plate 340 to move down can be implemented using the pressing side or expansion of the spring and the moving guide component.
한편, 상하부 패널하우징이 높이가 같아진 상태가 되면, 상호 결합 수단 혹은 걸림 수단이 존재하여 높이가 같아진 상태를 유지하게 된다.On the other hand, when the upper and lower panel housings are in the same height, mutual coupling means or locking means exist to maintain the same height.
그리고, 표시장치 사용자가 결합 수단 혹은 걸림 수단을 풀게 되면, 받침 플레이트(340)가 아래로 이동하는 데 사용하는 스프링이 복원되어 상부 패널하우징이 하부 패널하우징 위로 올라가고, 좌우 방향으로 이동하는 데에 사용된 받침 플레이트(340)와 플레이트(310)의 스프링도 복원되어 결과적으로 상하부 패널하우징이 원상태로 겹쳐지게 된다. When the user of the display device releases the coupling means or the locking means, the spring used to move the support plate 340 is restored so that the upper panel housing is raised above the lower panel housing, and used to move in the left and right directions. The springs of the supporting plate 340 and the plate 310 are also restored so that the upper and lower panel housings overlap in the original state.
도 116은 측면의 움직임으로 상하부 패널하우징이 이동하는 원리를 알 수 있도록 설명한 도면이다. 여기서 받침 플레이트(340)를 지지하는 받침부(43C)와 받침 플레이트(340)가 서로 이동 사용하는 이동 수단(341)이 구비된다. 상기 이동수단(341)은 플레이트와 바닥판이 스프링 복합체를 통해 이동하는 원리가 적용된 부품이 사용될 수 있다.FIG. 116 is a view for explaining a principle in which the upper and lower panel housings move by side movement. Here, the support part 43C which supports the support plate 340, and the moving means 341 which move and use the support plate 340 mutually are provided. The moving unit 341 may be a component to which the principle of moving the plate and the bottom plate through the spring composite is applied.
한편, 패널하우징(20)(40)이 펼쳐진 다음 상하 방향으로 이동할 때, 상하 이동 거리를 줄이기 위해서는 한쪽의 패널하우징이 높이를 더 얇게 할 필요가 있다. 이렇게 얇게 하는 패널하우징의 구조는 도 53과 도 58의 실시예를 적용할 수 있다.On the other hand, when the panel housings 20 and 40 are unfolded and then moved in the vertical direction, one panel housing needs to have a thinner height in order to reduce the vertical movement distance. The thinner structure of the panel housing can be applied to the embodiments of FIGS. 53 and 58.
도 117과 도 118은 하부 패널하우징 상태의 개요를 나타낸 도면으로, 앞의 실시예 도 92와 도 93에서 도시된 돌기판(76)의 모양이 응용된 것으로 볼 수 있다. 도117은 플레이트(310)와 받침 플레이트(340)가 하나의 부품으로 연결되고, 받침부(43C)가 아래로 이동하므로 받침 플레이트(340) 아래로 내려감을 보이는 것이다. 단지 도 117은 도 112 의 23C의 중간 부분이 없다는 것이다. 117 and 118 are views showing an outline of a lower panel housing state, and it can be seen that the shape of the protrusion 76 shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 is applied to the previous embodiment. 117 shows that the plate 310 and the support plate 340 are connected in one piece, and the support 43C moves downward, so that the support plate 340 moves downward. 117 is without the middle part of 23C of FIG.
따라서, 23c의 중간 부분이 없는 도 117의 경우는 앞의 도면 37에서 설명된 덮개(23)가 상부 패널하우징에 구비되어야 하며, 용도도 도 37의 덮개(23)와 같다.Thus, in the case of FIG. 117 without the middle portion of 23c, the lid 23 described in FIG. 37 should be provided in the upper panel housing, and the use thereof is the same as the lid 23 of FIG.
도 118은 받침 플레이트(340)와 플레이트(310)가 하부 패널하우징 경계 밖으로 이동함을 보이는 도면이다. 밖으로 이동하는 구조가 되므로서 상부 패널하우징이 아래로 이동이 가능하게 된다.FIG. 118 shows the backing plate 340 and plate 310 moving out of the lower panel housing boundary. As the structure moves outward, the upper panel housing can be moved downward.
도 119와 도 120은 연장부가 구비된 실시예의 도면이다.119 and 120 are views of an embodiment provided with an extension.
앞의 실시예 도 32에서 도 40까지의 경우를 응용한 것으로서, 패널하우징 경계 밖으로 나오는 연장부(345) 더 구비하여 상하부 패널하우징의 높이가 상호 같아진 상태에서 서로를 더 견고하게 지지할 수 있는 역할을 하게 된다.32 to 40 is applied to the above embodiment, and further includes an extension portion 345 which comes out of the panel housing boundary to support each other more firmly in the state where the heights of the upper and lower panel housings are equal to each other. It will play a role.
이때, 상기 연장부(345)는 상부 패널하우징(20) 양 측면 내부에서 스프링 장치와 가이드 수단 등을 통해 슬라이딩 이동이 가능한 구조가 된다. 따라서 상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징이 겹쳐진 상태에서는 연장부(345)가 상부 패널하우징(20) 안으로 들어가게 되고, 펼쳐진 상태에서는 상기 연장부(345)가 밖으로 나오게 된다.At this time, the extension portion 345 is a structure that is capable of sliding movement through the spring device and the guide means in the both sides of the upper panel housing 20. Accordingly, in the state where the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing overlap, the extension part 345 enters the upper panel housing 20, and in the unfolded state, the extension part 345 comes out.
도 121은 결합 수단의 한 예를 나타낸 도면이다. 121 is a view showing an example of a coupling unit.
상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징이 펼쳐진 다음 높이가 같아진 상태에서, 그 상태를 유지하기 위한 결합 수단(55)(55a) 혹은 걸림 수단(55)(55a)의 예이다.It is an example of the engaging means 55, 55a or the locking means 55, 55a for maintaining the state in which the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing are unfolded and then the same height.
도면에서는 상하부 패널하우징이 같은 높이로 펼쳐지면 상호 맞 닿을 위치에 돌기 혹은 홈을 구비하여 결합지지력을 갖게 한다는 것을 나타낸 도면이다. 도 121에서는 결합 수단 혹은 걸림 수단(55)(55a)의 위치를 나타낸 도면으로, 실제로는 상부 패널하우징과 하부 패널하우징이 맞 닿은 곳이면 어디는 상관은 없다.In the drawings, the upper and lower panel housings are provided with protrusions or grooves in contact with each other when the upper and lower panel housings are unfolded at the same height so as to have a coupling bearing force. In FIG. 121, it is a figure which shows the position of the engagement means or the locking means 55 and 55a, and it does not matter where the upper panel housing and the lower panel housing contact actually.
그리고, 홈과 돌기의 구조를 가지고 상호 맞물리는 형태를 취하면 본 발명의 목적을 달성할 수가 있다. In addition, the object of the present invention can be achieved by taking the form of the groove and the protrusion to engage with each other.
도 122와 도 123은 하부 패널하우징이 이동하는 또 다른 실시예의 도면이다.122 and 123 are views of another embodiment in which the lower panel housing is moved.
도 122는 하우징(50) 내부에 있는 하부 패널하우징(40)이 좌우 방향으로 슬라이동 이동하고 상부 방향으로 이동하여 두 개의 패널하우징이 펼쳐지게 되는 원리를 나타낸 도면이다.FIG. 122 is a view illustrating a principle in which the lower panel housing 40 in the housing 50 slides in the left and right directions and moves in the upper direction so that the two panel housings are unfolded.
도 123은 이러한 이동의 원리를 나타낸 도면으로, 상부 패널하우징 하부에는 바닥판(81-1)이 구비되며, 상기 바닥판(81-1)의 양옆 돌기를 통해 고정홈(350)이 이동하게 된다.123 is a view showing the principle of such a movement, the bottom panel 81-1 is provided in the lower upper panel housing, the fixing groove 350 is moved through the projections on both sides of the bottom plate 81-1. .
그리고 상기 고정홈(350)가 일체로 구성된 지지판(351)에는 연장 지지판(352)이 구비된다. 즉 상기 연장 지지판(352)은 더 펼쳐지게 되므로 하부 패널하우징이(40) 상부 패널하우징(20) 경계 밖으로 나오게 된다. 그리고, 스프링 장치(353)(353a)을 통해 하부 패널하우징(40)이 위쪽 방향으로 이동하게 된다. 이때, 이동 수단(352a)은 지지판(351)과 연장 지지판(352)이 좌우 이동이 가능하도록 하는 스프링 복합체이게 된다. In addition, the support plate 351 is formed integrally with the fixing groove 350 is provided with an extension support plate 352. In other words, the extended support plate 352 is further extended so that the lower panel housing 40 comes out of the boundary of the upper panel housing 20. The lower panel housing 40 moves upward through the spring devices 353 and 353a. At this time, the moving means 352a is a spring composite to allow the support plate 351 and the extended support plate 352 to move left and right.
즉, 하부 패널하우징(40)이 좌우 방향으로 이동할 때에는 바닥판(81-1)과 고정홈(350)이 사용된다. 그리고, 하부 패널하우징(40)이 상부 패널하우징(20) 경계 밖으로 나올 때에는, 지지판(351)과 연장 지지판(352)이 사용된다. 또한, 밖으로 나온 하부 패널하우징(40)이 위 방향으로 이동할 때에는 스프링 장치(353)(353a)가 사용되는 것이다.That is, when the lower panel housing 40 moves in the left and right directions, the bottom plate 81-1 and the fixing groove 350 are used. And, when the lower panel housing 40 comes out of the upper panel housing 20 boundary, the support plate 351 and the extended support plate 352 are used. In addition, the spring device (353, 353a) is used when the lower panel housing 40 is moved upward.
이때, 도 112도에서 118도의 실시예는 패널하우징(20)(40)이 같은 높이로 펼쳐진 상태일 (도 115)때 스프링이 팽창 혹은 압축 상태이고, 패널하우징이 겹쳐진 상태(도112)일 때 스프링이 복원 상태이다. 반면에, 도 122와 도 123은 패널하우징이 겹쳐진 상태 일 때 스프링이 팽창 혹은 압축 상태이고 패널하우징이 펼쳐진 상태일 때 스프링이 복원 상태이다. At this time, the embodiment of Fig. 112 to 118 is the spring when the panel housing 20, 40 is expanded to the same height (Fig. 115) when the spring is in an expanded or compressed state, the panel housing is overlapped (Fig. 112) The spring is in a restored state. On the other hand, FIGS. 122 and 123 show the spring in the expanded or compressed state when the panel housing overlaps, and the spring in the restored state when the panel housing is unfolded.
따라서, 도 112도에서 118도의 실시예는 패널하우징(20)(40)이 같은 높이로 펼쳐진 상태일 때, 걸림 수단 혹은 결합수단(도 121의 설명)이 있어야 그 상태가 유지된다. 하지만 도 122와 도 123은 두 개의 패널하우징이 겹쳐져 있을 때 걸림 수단 혹은 결합 수단(도 121설명)이 있어야 그 상태가 유지된다. Accordingly, in the embodiment of FIG. 112 to 118, when the panel housing 20 and 40 are unfolded at the same height, the locking means or the coupling means (described in FIG. 121) is required to maintain the state. However, FIG. 122 and FIG. 123 need to have a locking means or a coupling means (described in FIG. 121) when the two panel housings overlap to maintain the state.
물론, 스프링의 압축 팽창 혹은 복원 상태를 반대로 하여, 도 112도와 도 118도이 실시예에서 펼쳐진 상태일 때 스프링의 복원 상태가 되게 할 수도 있다. 즉 상기 걸림 수단 혹은 결합 수단은 압축 혹은 팽창 상태일 때, 상하부 패널하우징이 서로 맞 닿은 위치에 구비되어 잠김 역할을 할 수 있다는 것이다. Of course, the compression inflation or restoring state of the spring may be reversed, resulting in a restoring state of the spring when FIGS. 112 and 118 are in the extended state in the embodiment. That is, when the locking means or the coupling means is in a compressed or expanded state, the upper and lower panel housings may be provided at positions where they are in contact with each other to serve as a locking function.
결합 수단 혹은 장김 수단의 작용은 도 107에서 두 개의 패널하우징의 움직임을 보면 알 수 있다. 즉 두 개의 패널하우징이 서로 맞 닿을 때에 약간 벌어졌다가 맞 닿게 되는데, 이때 걸림 수단이나 결합 수단의 장김 작용도 아울러 일어나게 되는 것이다. The action of the engaging means or the securing means can be seen by the movement of the two panel housings in FIG. That is, when the two panel housings touch each other, a little wider space is brought into contact with each other.

Claims (8)

  1. 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 상기 디스플레이가 상호 인접될 때, 상기 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내이며,At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, and each display panel is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings. In a portable display device in which a display mounted on a panel housing is adjacent to each other, when the displays are adjacent to each other, a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm,
    상기 디스플레이의 이음매부에 덮개가 구비된 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치. Portable display device characterized in that the cover is provided in the joint portion of the display.
  2. 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 상기 디스플레이가 상호 인접될 때, 상기 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내이며,At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, and each display panel is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings. In a portable display device in which a display mounted on a panel housing is adjacent to each other, when the displays are adjacent to each other, a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm,
    상부 패널하우징을 지지하는 지지부가 구비되며, 상기 지지부는 상부 패널하우징과 스프링 복합체를 통해 움직이며 힘을 가하면 압축 혹은 팽창되며, 힘이 풀어지면 복원 되는 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치. And a support part supporting the upper panel housing, wherein the support part is moved through the upper panel housing and the spring complex and is compressed or expanded when a force is applied, and is restored when the force is released.
  3. 제 1항에 있어서, 상기 하부 패널하우징에서 하부 디스플레이의 이음매부 측면을 덮는 하부 덮개가 구비되고 상기 하부 덮개는 상하 방향으로 이동 가능 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치.The portable display device of claim 1, wherein a lower cover is provided in the lower panel housing to cover a side of a seam of the lower display, and the lower cover is movable in a vertical direction.
  4. 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 상기 디스플레이가 상호 인접될 때, 상기 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내이며,At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, and each display panel is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings. In a portable display device in which a display mounted on a panel housing is adjacent to each other, when the displays are adjacent to each other, a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm,
    상기 디스플레이는 플레임 하우징에 직접 장착되고, 상기 프레임 하우징 하단에는 표시장치 본체 부품이 구비되며, 상기 프레임 하우징에서 디스플레이가 연결되는 연결부가 구비되는 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치. The display is mounted directly to the flame housing, the lower portion of the frame housing is provided with a display device body parts, characterized in that the portable display device characterized in that the connection is connected to the display in the frame housing.
  5. 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 상기 디스플레이가 상호 인접될 때, 상기 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내이며,At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, and each display panel is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings. In a portable display device in which a display mounted on a panel housing is adjacent to each other, when the displays are adjacent to each other, a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm,
    상부 패널하우징을 지지하는 지지부가 구비되며, 상기 지지부는 하부 패널하우징 경계부 밖으로 나오는 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치.And a support part supporting the upper panel housing, wherein the support part comes out of the lower panel housing boundary.
  6. 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 두 개의 패널하우징에서 한 개의 패널하우징이 높이가 더 얇은 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치.At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, and each display panel is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings. A portable display device in which a display mounted on a panel housing is adjacent to each other, wherein one panel housing is thinner in two panel housings.
  7. 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 상기 디스플레이가 상호 인접될 때, 상기 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내이며,At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, and each display panel is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings. In a portable display device in which a display mounted on a panel housing is adjacent to each other, when the displays are adjacent to each other, a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm,
    디스플레이 상단에 구비된 입력장치 사이의 거리도 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내인 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치.Portable display device, characterized in that the distance between the input device provided on the top of the display within 0.1mm to 5mm.
  8. 적어도 두개의 패널하우징이 상부와 하부에 적층되어 구비되고, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징에 각각 디스플레이가 장착되며, 상기 상 하부 패널하우징이 상호 좌우 방향으로 슬라이딩 이동되고, 상하 방향으로도 이동하여, 상기 상하부 패널하우징에 장착된 디스플레이가 상호 인접되게 되는 휴대용 표시장치에서, 상기 디스플레이가 상호 인접될 때, 상기 디스플레이 사이의 거리는 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내이며,At least two panel housings are stacked on top and bottom, and each display panel is mounted on the upper and lower panel housings. In a portable display device in which a display mounted on a panel housing is adjacent to each other, when the displays are adjacent to each other, a distance between the displays is within 0.1 mm to 5 mm,
    디스플레이 상단에 구비된 입력장치 사이의 거리도 0.1mm에서 5 mm 이내인 것을 특징으로 하는 휴대용 표시장치.Portable display device, characterized in that the distance between the input device provided on the top of the display within 0.1mm to 5mm.
PCT/KR2010/008110 2009-10-08 2010-11-16 Portable display apparatus WO2011059301A2 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN2010800519028A CN102667584A (en) 2009-11-16 2010-11-16 Portable display apparatus
US13/509,645 US8964365B2 (en) 2009-10-08 2010-11-16 Portable display apparatus
US14/595,282 US20150123908A1 (en) 2009-10-08 2015-01-13 Portable display apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20090110228A KR20110038560A (en) 2009-10-08 2009-11-16 A portable display device
KR10-2009-0110228 2009-11-16

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/509,645 A-371-Of-International US8964365B2 (en) 2009-10-08 2010-11-16 Portable display apparatus
US14/595,282 Continuation US20150123908A1 (en) 2009-10-08 2015-01-13 Portable display apparatus

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011059301A2 true WO2011059301A2 (en) 2011-05-19
WO2011059301A3 WO2011059301A3 (en) 2011-11-10

Family

ID=43992270

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2010/008110 WO2011059301A2 (en) 2009-10-08 2010-11-16 Portable display apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN102667584A (en)
WO (1) WO2011059301A2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013192082A (en) * 2012-03-14 2013-09-26 Fujitsu Ltd Display device and portable terminal device

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103972023A (en) * 2013-01-28 2014-08-06 海洋王照明科技股份有限公司 Field emission lamp
EP3323036A4 (en) * 2015-07-13 2019-05-29 Quan Xiao Apparatus and method for hybrid type of input of buttons/keys and "finger writing" and low profile/variable geometry hand-based controller
KR20200115940A (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device
CN112445295B (en) * 2019-08-28 2024-04-02 富联精密电子(天津)有限公司 Anti-blocking structure of case
CN111312081B (en) * 2020-03-31 2022-07-08 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Electronic device

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20040025624A (en) * 2002-09-19 2004-03-24 송민규 Dual slide display
KR20050108706A (en) * 2004-05-13 2005-11-17 김시환 Portable display device
KR20060030143A (en) * 2004-10-05 2006-04-10 이재곤 A device for multi-lcd whit a mobile phone.
KR20060122633A (en) * 2005-05-27 2006-11-30 엘지전자 주식회사 Slide mobile communication terminal having dual lcd
KR100921580B1 (en) * 2002-09-17 2009-10-13 (주)폴딩모바일 Multi display device

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU2001294286A1 (en) * 2000-09-19 2002-04-02 Si Han Kim Multi display device
WO2003019349A1 (en) * 2001-08-25 2003-03-06 Si Han Kim Portable multi-display device
US7570483B2 (en) * 2005-06-01 2009-08-04 Kim Si-Han Portable display device
KR20070034707A (en) * 2005-09-26 2007-03-29 삼성전자주식회사 Display device
US8243021B2 (en) * 2006-03-31 2012-08-14 Intel Corporation Slide and rotate display configurations for a handheld computing device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR100921580B1 (en) * 2002-09-17 2009-10-13 (주)폴딩모바일 Multi display device
KR20040025624A (en) * 2002-09-19 2004-03-24 송민규 Dual slide display
KR20050108706A (en) * 2004-05-13 2005-11-17 김시환 Portable display device
KR20060030143A (en) * 2004-10-05 2006-04-10 이재곤 A device for multi-lcd whit a mobile phone.
KR20060122633A (en) * 2005-05-27 2006-11-30 엘지전자 주식회사 Slide mobile communication terminal having dual lcd

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013192082A (en) * 2012-03-14 2013-09-26 Fujitsu Ltd Display device and portable terminal device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN105700839A (en) 2016-06-22
CN102667584A (en) 2012-09-12
WO2011059301A3 (en) 2011-11-10
CN105700839B (en) 2021-10-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2010082800A2 (en) Portable display device
WO2015102438A1 (en) Display apparatus
WO2017222346A1 (en) Electronic device having complex human interface
WO2011059301A2 (en) Portable display apparatus
WO2020145718A1 (en) Display substrate
WO2022025311A1 (en) Mobile terminal
EP3058561A1 (en) Display apparatus
WO2014196724A1 (en) Wall mounting-type flexible display
WO2022010061A1 (en) Display support apparatus
WO2021137505A1 (en) Display apparatus
WO2023038366A1 (en) Antenna and electronic apparatus including same
WO2017047938A1 (en) Display apparatus and apparatus for controlling the same
WO2012005541A2 (en) Portable display device
WO2021172947A1 (en) Refrigerator
WO2021162139A1 (en) Mobile terminal
WO2020197348A1 (en) Lens barrel and camera module comprising same
WO2019226011A1 (en) Information output device
WO2021080061A1 (en) Electronic pen sensing device and electronic appliance comprising same
WO2011126334A2 (en) Portable display apparatus
WO2010085057A2 (en) Sliding module, and driving apparatus used in same
WO2022149739A1 (en) Electronic device including hinge structure
WO2022025433A1 (en) Protrusion-based smart tablet
WO2021210692A1 (en) Display device
WO2023167422A1 (en) Slot member and power electronic device including same
WO2024053768A1 (en) Face-mounted display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201080051902.8

Country of ref document: CN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 13509645

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 10830233

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2